Table of Contents
- Compliance Statements
- User Information
- Product Information
- Package Contents
- Contents
- About This Manual
- Introduction
- Overview
- Features
- Requirements
- Components
- KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6900R (Receiver) Front View
- KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View
- KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View
- KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View
- KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6940R (Receiver) Front View
- KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View
- KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View
- KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View
- KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View
- KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View
- KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View
- KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
- KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View
- KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
- KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View
- KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View
- KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View
- KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View
- PoE Power Redundancy
- Hardware Setup
- Mounting
- KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation
- KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation
- KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation
- KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation
- KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation
- KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation
- KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation
- KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation
- KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation
- KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation
- KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation
- KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation
- Network Configuration
- Default IP Addresses
- KE I/O Ports
- LED Display
- OSD Operation
- Software Installation
- Browser / Telnet Operation
- System Status
- System Settings
- Connections
- Scheduled Profile
- Sessions
- Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
- Firmware Upgrade Utility
- CLI Commands
- Appendix
- Safety Instructions
- Technical Support
- Specifications
- Optional Rack Mount
- IP Installer
- Trusted Certificates
- Self-Signed Private Certificates
- Reset All Information
- RS-232 Pin Assignments
- Multicast IP Address
- Keys to Network Performance
- Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures
- Virtual Media Support
- Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows
- Limited Warranty
ATEN KE9950R User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for KE9950R by ATEN which is a product in the KVM Extenders category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
ATEN Altusen™
KE Series & CCKM
KVM over IP Extender and
KE Matrix Manager Soware
User Manual
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
ii
Compliance Statements
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE
STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Caution
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Warning
Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio
interference.
Achtung
Der Gebrauch dieses Geräts in Wohnumgebung kann Funkstörungen
verursachen.
KCC Statement
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
iii
Industry Canada Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
HDMI Trademark Statement
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc.
RoHS
This product is RoHS compliant.
User Information
Online Registration
Be sure to register your product at our online support center:
Telephone Support
For telephone support, call this number:
International http://eservice.aten.com
International 886-2-8692-6959
China 86-400-810-0-810
Japan 81-3-5615-5811
Korea 82-2-467-6789
North America 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988
1-949-428-1111
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
iv
User Notice
All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual
are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or
implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any
warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of
the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is.
Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and
not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all
necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages
resulting from any defect in the software.
The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the
responsibility of the user to correct such interference.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation
of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior
to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS
CORRECT BEFORE USE.
Product Information
For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect
without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized
Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:
International http://www.aten.com
North America http://www.aten-usa.com
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
v
Package Contents
The contents contained in the standard package of each KE Series device is
listed below. Check to make sure that all components are in working order. If
you encounter any problem, please contact your dealer.
KE6900 / KE6940
KE6900T / KE6940T DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940T only)
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6900R / KE6940R DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions
KE6900A / KE6940A
KE6900AT / KE6940AT DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP
Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AT only)
1 power adapter
1 foot pad et
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
vi
KE6900AR / KE6940AR DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP
Transmitter with Internet Port:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only)
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6900ST
KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Transmitter Lite:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6910 / KE6912
KE6910T / KE6912T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 power adapter (KE6910T only)
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
vii
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6910R / KE6912R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE6910R only)
1 user instructions
KE6920 / KE6922
KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP /
KE6922T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP & PoE:
1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 power adapter (KE6910T only)
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP / KE6922R
DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP & PoE:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE6910R only)
1 user instructions
KE8900S
KE8900ST Slim HDMI KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 USB HDMI KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
viii
1HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE8900SR Slim HDMI KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE8950 / KE8952
KE8950T / KE8952T 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 USB HDMI KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter (KE8950T only)
1 mounting kit
1HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE8950R / KE8952R 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE8950R only)
1HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE9900ST
KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 DisplayPort cable
1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
ix
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE9950 / KE9952
KE9950T / KE9952T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:
1 Transmitter
1 DisplayPort cable
1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter (KE9950T only)
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE9950R / KE9952R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE9950R only)
1 user instructions
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
x
Contents
Compliance Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Online Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
User Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Product Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
KE6900 / KE6940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
KE6900A / KE6940A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
KE6910 / KE6912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
KE6920 / KE6922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
KE8900S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
KE8950 / KE8952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
KE9950 / KE9952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Chapter 1.
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Supported Video Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Computers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CCKM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
KE6900R (Receiver) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xi
KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
KE6940R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
PoE Power Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 2.
Hardware Setup
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Attaching the Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rack Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wall Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xii
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 112
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 113
KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 . . . . . . . .115
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . . . . .116
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 . . . . .118
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . .119
KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 121
KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 122
KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 124
KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 125
KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 128
KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 129
KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 131
KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 132
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xiii
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Exit OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Default IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
KE I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 3.
OSD Operation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Invoking the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
OSD Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Non-OSD Hotkeys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reverting to Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hotkey Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Microphone Hotkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
OSD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Logging in for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Regular Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Slim Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Internet Port (AiT Models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
IP Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Service Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
CCVSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Working Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
OSD Matrix Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Connections Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
List Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Array Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Profile Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Push Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Pull Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 4.
Software Installation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
KE Matrix Manager Software Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xiv
Upgrading License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Linux Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Chapter 5.
Browser / Telnet Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
The KE Matrix Manager Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Web Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installation Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Adding Transmitters and Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adding Network Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Instant Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
RS-232 / Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1. Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2. Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
3. System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Chapter 6.
System Status
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SFP Module Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Internet Port (AiT models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
CCVSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Private Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Certificate Signing Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Copy & Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Virtual Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Intelligent Dual Video Output Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Transmitter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transmitter Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
SFP Module Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Copy & Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Receiver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Video Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Receiver Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xv
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Network Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Adding Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Modifying Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Deleting Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Adding Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Modifying Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Deleting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Assigning Device Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Adding a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Adding a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Chapter 7.
System Settings
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Connection Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Login Access Priority (AiT Models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
ANMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Event Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Authentication & Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
FW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Firmware Upgrade Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Backup / Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Private Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Certificate Signing Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 8.
Connections
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Chapter 9.
Scheduled Profile
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xvi
Chapter 10.
Sessions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Chapter 11.
Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
The Windows/Java Client AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Control Panel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Gamma Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Virtual Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Virtual Media Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Virtual Media Redirection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Smart Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
The On-Screen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Mouse Pointer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Mouse DynaSync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Manual Mouse Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Control Panel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chapter 12.
Firmware Upgrade Utility
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Starting the Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Upgrade Succeeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Firmware Upgrade Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Chapter 13.
CLI Commands
Serial Control Protocol Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Configuring the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Device/Profile Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Switch Port Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Mute Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Profile Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
EDID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
RS-232 Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
OSD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
List Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xvii
Read Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Set Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Appendix
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Rack Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
KE6900T / KE6940T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
KE6900R / KE6940R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
KE6900AT / KE6940AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
KE6900AR / KE6940AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
KE6900ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
KE6910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
KE6912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
KE6920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
KE6922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
KE8900S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
KE8950T / KE8952T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
KE8950R / KE8952R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
KE9900ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
KE9950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
KE9952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Optional Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Dual Rack Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Transmitter Dual Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Receiver Dual Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Single Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
IP Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Trusted Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Self-Signed Private Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Importing the Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Reset All Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Default Password Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
RS-232 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Transmitter Front RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Multicast IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
KE Multicast Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Multicast IP Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
If X is between 0 ~ 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xviii
If X is between 128 ~ 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
If X is 192 or higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Keys to Network Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Build a Network Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Other Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Choose a High Performance Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Number of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Stackable verse Standalone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
What Stackable Switches Can do:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Configuring Switches and KE Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
KE transmitter Settings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Recommended Network Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Windows:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Sun / Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Virtual Media Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xix
About This Manual
This manual is provided to help you get the most out of your KVM over IP
Matrix System. It covers all aspects of the device and system, including
installation, configuration, and operation.
The KVM over IP Extender models covered in this user manuals are:
An overview of the information found in the manual is provided below.
Chapter 1, Introduction, introduces you to the KVM over IP Matrix
System, its purpose, features, and benefits, with its front and back panel
components described.
Chapter 2, Hardware Setup, provides step-by-step instructions for setting
up your installation, and explains some basic operation procedures.
Models Product Names
KE6900 DVI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900A DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900AiT DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet
Access
KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite
KE6910 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6912 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KE6920 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual
SFP
KE6922 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual
SFP & PoE
KE6940 DVI Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940A DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940AiT DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access
KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8950 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8952 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
with PoE
KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter)
KE9950 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE9952 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xx
Chapter 3, OSD Operation, explains the fundamental concepts involved in
operating the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 /
KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT / KE8900S /
KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952, and provides a complete
description of the On Screen Displays (OSDs) and the functions contained.
Chapter 4, Software Installation, explains the administrative procedures
that are required to download and install the KE Matrix Manager software on
Windows and Linux systems.
Chapter 5, Browser / Telnet Operation, explains how to log in to the KE
Matrix Manager with a web browser, and describes the various functions
provided.
Chapter 6, System Status, explains how to use the KE Matrix Manager’s
system status panel to manage transmitters, receivers, switches, users, profiles,
and logs.
Chapter 7, System Settings, explains the KE Matrix Manager’s system
settings, which are categorized into General, ANMS, LDAP/AD, RADIUS,
TACACS+ authentication, F/W Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore,
Certificates, and Sessions tabs.
Chapter 8, Connections, describes how to use the KE Matrix Manager ‘s
connections panel to quickly view, connect, and disconnect Transmitter-
Receiver connections.
Chapter 9, Scheduled Profile, describes how to use the KE Matrix
Manager’s scheduled profile panel to view and manage profile schedules.
Chapter 10, Sessions, describes how to use the KE Matrix Manager’s
sessions panel to view and disconnect user sessions.
Chapter 11, Remote Viewer (AiT Models only), describes how to use
remote viewer(s) to view and control video sources connected to AiT
transmitters.
Chapter 12, Firmware Upgrade Utility, explains how to download and
use the Firmware Upgrade Utility for upgrading the firmware of the devices
connected.
Chapter 13, CLI Commands, provides a complete list of the serial
protocol and TCP/IP commands used when utilizing the RS-232 serial port or
a network connection to configure the KE devices.
Appendix, provides the technical and troubleshooting information of KE
devices at the end of the manual.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
xxi
Note:
Read this manual thoroughly and follow the installation and operation
procedures carefully to prevent any damage to the unit or connected
devices.
ATEN regularly updates its product documentation for new features and
fixes. For an up-to-date KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST /
KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A /
KE6940AiT / KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 /
KE9952 documentation, visit
http://www.aten.com/global/en/
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.
[ ] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means
to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear
together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them:
[Ctrl+Alt].
1. Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.
♦Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential
steps.
>Indicates selecting consecutive options (such as on a menu or
dialog box). For example, Start
>
Run means to open the Start
menu, and then select Run.
Indicates critical information.
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Overview
The KVM over IP Matrix System is a solution that combines KE Series KVM
over IP Extenders (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6940, KE6940A,
KE6940AiT, KE6900ST, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE8900S,
KE8950, KE8952, KE9900ST, KE9950, KE9952), with the KE Matrix
Manager Software (CCKM) to extend, control and monitor access to
computers, across a network, in a multitude of ways. The system lets you setup
a matrix of remote KVM consoles that access computers across a network, with
the flexibility to control and configure each connection.
The high-performance IP-based KE Extenders are consisted of a transmitter
and a receiver. The transmitter connects to a computer to deliver the
computer’s data to the receiver to collectively provide console access from a
remote or separate location. The computer can be accessed from the remote
console via a standard TCP/IP network or direct Ethernet cable connection.
This is perfect for any installation where you need to place the console where
it is convenient, but you want the computer to reside in a secure location —
away from the keyboard, mouse and display.
The extenders support flawless and lossless video compression quality with
ultra low latency, some extenders also support 2K x 2K video resolution (2048
x 2048 @ 60Hz), which is used widely in the Air Traffic Control (ATC)
industry. For a list of video resolution support, refer to Supported Video
Resolutions on page 7.
For power redundancy, some extenders have dual power supplies, some
provide single power supply with a Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAN port,
while some provide dual power supplies and a PoE LAN port.
Some extenders support Fiber Channel over Ethernet via SFP fiber modules*
which connect to a network switch at speeds up to 1 Gbps. The extenders can
connect unit-to-unit or over a TCP/IP network via Gigabit Ethernet or the SFP
ports. Connecting both methods allows network failover.
The non-slim KE over IP Extenders have local On Screen Display (OSD) on
the receiver end to configure both receiver and transmitter — for easy setup
and operation. Both the transmitter and receiver have RS-232 ports to connect
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
2
to a serial terminal for configuration or serial devices such as touchscreens and
barcode scanners.
The AiT models can connect to an Office LAN to support the Control Center
Video Session Recorder (CCVSR) software and WinClient/JavaClient. The
CCVSR records all operations made on servers accessed through KVM over
IP switches. Every operation and change are recorded and saved to a secure
video file for security reference and troubleshooting purposes, etc. By using
WinClient/JavaClient, you are provided with console access from a separate
location over intranet and/or Internet.
Slimmer versions of KE over IP Extenders are also available. These are
KE6900ST, KE8900S or KE9900ST, and are cost and space saving
alternatives for installations with extenders that don't need a local console or
audio transmission, but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.
KE6900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DVI input.
KE8900S offers a slim KVM over IP Transmitter (KE8900ST) and a slim
KVM over IP Receiver (KE8900SR) to respectively support HDMI video
input from the computer and one HDMI monitor output. KE9900ST is a slim
KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DisplayPort input. In addition to a DC
power jack, both the KE8900ST and KE9900ST transmitters have an extra DC
terminal block each for convenient installation.
Since different KE over IP Extenders support different types of video
interfaces (DVI, HDMI, DisplayPort, etc.), video resolutions, power
redundancy function and network failover feature, administrators/users may
select and tailor what is currently best for your environment, and for expected
or unexpected future expansions.
Refer to the table below for the variations in interfaces, functions and features:
Models
DVI HDMI DisplayPort Power Redun-
dancy via PoE*
Power Redun-
dancy via Second
Power Jack
Network Failover -
SFP
KE6900 1 - - - - -
KE6900A 1 - - - 1 1
KE6900AiT 1 - - - 1 1
KE6900ST 1 - - - - -
KE6910 1 - - - 1 1
KE6912 1 - - 1 - 1
KE6920 1 - - - 1 2
KE6922 1 - - 1 1 2
KE6940 2 - - - - -
KE6940A 2 - - - 1 1
KE6940AiT 2 - - - 1 1
KE8900S - 1 - - - -
KE8950 - 1 - - - 1
Chapter 1. Introduction
3
*Power redundancy via PoE requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
KVM over IP Extenders allow flexible setup as they can make console-to-
computer connections in several ways: one-to-one (Extender mode), one-to-
many (Splitter mode), many-to-one (Switch mode), or many-to-many (Matrix
mode).
The KE Matrix Manager Software (CCKM) allows you to define the
aforementioned matrix connections and manage KE Extenders with features
such as auto-detection of KE Extenders, username/password authentication,
switching and sharing of connections, scheduling, permissions and more.
Whether you're extending computer access for Monitoring, Broadcasting,
Editing or Workstation setup, the KVM over IP Matrix System gives you the
flexibility and control to manage one or hundreds of extended connections. For
more detailed feature list, refer to Features on page 4.
Note: The SFP module is sold separately. You can choose the 2A-136G, a
multi-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 550
meters; or the 2A-137G, a single-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE
connectivity up to 10 kilometers. Visit ATEN's website or contact your
ATEN dealer for more information.
KE8952 - 1 - 1 - 1
KE9900ST - - 1 - - -
KE9950 - - 1 - 1 1
KE9952 - - 1 1 - 1
Models
DVI HDMI DisplayPort Power Redun-
dancy via PoE*
Power Redun-
dancy via Second
Power Jack
Network Failover -
SFP
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
4
Features
Remote KVM console access of computers over LAN or Ethernet cable
connection
Dual console operation — control your system from both the Transmitter
and Receiver by USB keyboard, monitor, and mouse
RS-232 serial ports
allows you to connect to a serial terminal for
configuration, and serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode
scanners
1
Superior video quality
2
— up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz with 24-bit color
depth (KE69 Series / KE8900S); up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) with
36-bit color depth (KE99 Series); up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:4:4) with
36-bit color depth (KE8950 / KE8952)
Supports standard resolutions from 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
(KE69 Series / KE8900S); and resolutions from 640 x 480 to 3840 x 2160
@ 30 / 60 Hz (KE99 Series / KE8950 and KE8952)
Supports 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60 Hz) (KE6910 /
KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922)
OSD (On Screen Display) on the Receiver configures Tx / Rx devices
Supports KE Matrix Manager Web GUI
administration
3
Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality — compliant with IEEE
802.3at and 802.3af standards (KE6912, KE6922, KE8952 and KE9952)
Boundless Switching — simply move the mouse cursor across screen
boundaries to switch between different receivers
Intelligent Dual Video Output Management — split two video sources
from a dual display Transmitter and connect to each from different
Receivers (KE6940/KE6940A)
Gigabit Ethernet port
Remote login security
DVI digital and analog monitor support (KE6900 / KE6900A /
KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 /
KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
HDMI monitor support (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952)
DisplayPort monitor support (KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952)
Built-in ESD protection and surge protection
Chapter 1. Introduction
5
Supports 2 channel analog (KE69 Series) and 7.1 channel surround sound
(KE89 / KE99 Series) stereo speakers and microphone
Auto-MDIX — automatically detects cable type
Supports widescreen formats
Supports High-Quality Video streaming
Virtual Media Support
Hot pluggable
Rack Mountable
Upgradeable firmware
Supports digital audio (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST /
KE9950 / KE9952)
Adaptive Fast Switching — automatically fast switches between different
Tx video resolutions on a Rx display within 0.3 second (KE6910/KE6912)
Authentication Lock — automatically logs in when the power of the
system is resumed after power off
Connection Redundancy — automatically connects to another transmitter
(Tx) after disconnection with the original Tx, ensuring constant access to
servers (KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922
/ KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
Disconnection Alert — Pop-up warning message and looping alarm
beeping notify users the disconnection status (KE6910/KE6912)
Instant Link — Switch intuitively and efficiently between transmitter (Tx)
on a receiver (Rx) display
Supports recording of remotely-accessed computer operations using
ATEN CCVSR Video Session Recording Software
“Push” and “Pull” — shares content instantly to/from a single Rx or video
wall by just one click
Video Walls — create multiple video walls with up to 8 x 8 (64 displays
max.) in each layout
Four selectable access modes for multiple simultaneous access (Exclusive/
Occupy/Share/ View only mode)
Supports remote access via WinClient / JavaClient over intranet or Internet
Rx access control — users at the Tx local console can enable / disable Rx
access by simply pressing a control button
4
Note: 1. RS-232 serial ports support Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS/DTR/DSR signals only.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
6
2. Refer to Supported Video Resolutions below for details.
3. The KE Matrix Manager web GUI can be updated from the CCKM
page on our website (www.aten.com) or via eService website (http://
eservice.aten.com). The free version supports up to 8 KE devices. To
obtain a license for the full version of the software, please contact
your ATEN dealer.
4. The KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G) is sold
separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.
Chapter 1. Introduction
7
Supported Video Resolutions
Resolutions
KE6900 / KE6940
KE6900A / KE6940A
KE6900AiT /
KE6940AiT
KE6910 / KE6912
KE6920 / KE6922
KE8950 /
KE8952
KE9950 /
KE9952
KE6900ST /
KE8900S /
KE9900ST
3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz ●
3840 x 2160 @ 24/25/30 Hz ●
3440 x 1440 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●●
2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●●
2560 x 1080 @ 24/25/30/50/
60/100/120 Hz ●
2048 x 2048 @ 30/60 Hz ●
2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz ●●
2048 x 1536 @ 30 Hz ●
2048 x 1152 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 30 Hz ●●
1920 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●●
1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1600 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1680 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1400 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1280 x 1024 @ 60/75 Hz ●● ●●
1280 x 960 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1280 x 800 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1152 x 864 @ 75 Hz ●● ●●
1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1280 x 720 @ 60 Hz ●● ●●
1024 x 768 @ 60/70/75/85 Hz ●● ●●
848 x 480 @ 60 Hz ●
800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75/85
Hz ●● ●●
720 x 400 @ 70/85 Hz ●● ●●
640 x 480 @ 60/72/75/85 Hz ●● ●●
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
8
Requirements
Operating System
KE series devices are compatible with the following operating systems:
Mac OS
Oracle Solaris
Console
(KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/
KE6922) One DVI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible
resolution
(KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI compatible monitors capable
of the highest possible resolution
(KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI compatible monitor capable of
the highest possible resolution
(KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort compatible monitor
capable of the highest possible resolution
A USB mouse
A USB keyboard
Microphone and speakers
Computers
The following ports must be available on each computer that is to be connected
to the system:
(KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/
KE6922) One DVI port
OS Versions
Windows 32-bit XP / 7 / 8
64-bit XP / 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 /
Server 2016 / Server 2019
Linux
CentOS
Ubuntu
openSUSE
Red Hat
Chapter 1. Introduction
9
(KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI ports
(KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI port
(KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort port
USB Type A port
Audio ports
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
10
Cables
For optimal signal integrity and to simplify the setup, we strongly
recommend that you only use the high quality custom USB KVM Cable
that is provided with this package.
CCKM Requirements
The minimum hardware and software requirements for the computer running
the KE Matrix Manager software are:
Processor: Pentium 4, 2.60 GHz or above
Memory: 1 GB or above
HDD: 500 MB or above
Web browser: Internet Explorer 10 (or later), Chrome 70 (or later), Firefox
62 (or later)
Operating System Requirements:
Windows 7, 8.1, 10, server 2008, server 2012, or server 2016
Linux Ubuntu 16.04, CentOS 7
Note: Only Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 8 and OpenJDK 8 are
supported.
Chapter 1. Introduction
11
Components
KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(local or remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
1
3456
2
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
12
KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
46
2
5
3
789
1
Chapter 1. Introduction
13
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
9 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
14
KE6900R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
15
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
2. This USB port does not support isochronous
endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that
stream audio or video data, such as
speakers or webcams, will not work.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
16
KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see
USB Mode, page 224.
2. This USB port does not support isochronous
endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream
audio or video data, such as speakers or
webcams, will not work.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX
extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via
serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
2
567
34
8910
1
Chapter 1. Introduction
17
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special
functions, see USB Mode, page 224.
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
18
KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
1
3456
2
Chapter 1. Introduction
19
KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
56
4
23
7
1
8 9 10 11
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
20
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
21
KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,
see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
22
KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see
USB Mode, page 224.
5 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX
extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via
serial commands through the RS-232 port.
8 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
4
67
5
23
8
1
910 11 12
Chapter 1. Introduction
23
9 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special
functions, see USB Mode, page 224.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects
the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
24
KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
1
3456
2
Chapter 1. Introduction
25
KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow
access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
67
4
23
8
1
910 11 12
5
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
26
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
8 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
9 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
27
KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 Remote / Local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
243
1
5 6
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
28
KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
2
456
3
789
1
*
10 11
Chapter 1. Introduction
29
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack (KE6910T
only)
Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
30
KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,
see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
31
KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to
RX extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
2
567
3
8910
1
*
11 12
4
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
32
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack (KE6910R
only)
Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
33
KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
243
1
5 6
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
34
KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
2
456
3
789
1
10 11
Chapter 1. Introduction
35
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
36
KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Note: Use this port for virtual media or a USB
peripheral device.When using a USB disk plugged into
this port, see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
37
KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to
RX extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
2
567
3
8910
1
11 12
4
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
38
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.
11 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
39
KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
243
1
5 6
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
40
KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
2
456
3
789
1
Chapter 1. Introduction
41
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
9 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
42
KE6940R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
43
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
2. This USB port does not support isochronous
endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that
stream audio or video data, such as
speakers or webcams, will not work.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
44
KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All
Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port,
see USB Mode, page 224.
2. This USB port does not support isochronous
endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that
stream audio or video data, such as speakers or
webcams, will not work.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX
extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured
via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
2
567
3
8910
4
1
Chapter 1. Introduction
45
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports.
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
46
KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with
the package plugs into these ports to link the
Transmitter to the computer.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
1
3456
2
Chapter 1. Introduction
47
KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
56
4
23
7
1
89 10 11
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
48
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
11 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
49
KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 cocal LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
50
KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,
see USB Mode, page 224.
5 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
6 Power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX
extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via
serial commands through the RS-232 port.
8 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
4
67
5
23
8
1
910 11 12
Chapter 1. Introduction
51
9 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special
functions, see USB Mode, page 224.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects
the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
52
KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with
the package plugs into these ports to link the
Transmitter to the computer.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
1
3456
2
Chapter 1. Introduction
53
KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow
access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
67
4
23
8
1
910 11 12
5
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
54
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
8 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
9 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
55
KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View
No. Component Description
1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All
Information on page 381.
2 KVM port The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links
the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer
for serial control.
Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial
commands bypass the KE6900ST and are sent across
the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is
detected serial commands are automatically directed to
the KE6900ST for local configuration and control.
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
45
3
Rear View
2
1
Front View
6 7
Top View
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
56
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
7 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
57
KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
43
1
5
26
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
58
KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access
Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /
disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
46
2
5
3
78 10
9
1
Chapter 1. Introduction
59
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 Console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
60
KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
61
KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,
see USB Mode, page 224.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX
extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via
serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special
functions, see USB Mode, page 224.
2
56 7
3
89
4
10 11
1
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
62
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE
Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects
the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
63
KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
No. Component Description
1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
64
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the
Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for
serial control.
Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial
commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the
network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is
detected serial commands are automatically directed to the
KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB Type-B port The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 HDMI input The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal
block
Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 ~ 48 V) to the terminal block
for power input.
9 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
65
KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View
No. Component Description
1 USB peripheral
port
Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.
Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see
USB Mode, page 224.
2. This USB port does not support isochronous
endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream
audio or video data, such as speakers or
webcams, will not work.
2 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these
ports.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
66
3 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
4 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the
Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
5 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
6 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for
serial control.
Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial
commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the
network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is
detected serial commands are automatically directed to the
KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
8 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
9 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
67
KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
No. Component Description
1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the
end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while
pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade
failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but
the login information (username/password) to the factory default
settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information
on page 381.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
68
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the
Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for
serial control.
Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial
commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the
network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is
detected serial commands are automatically directed to the
KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB Type-B port The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 DisplayPort
Input
The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal
block
Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block
for power input.
9 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding
terminal
The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
No. Component Description
Chapter 1. Introduction
69
KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View
No. Component Description
1 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)
and microphone (pink).
2 KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that
links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these
ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the
computer for serial control.
4 remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation
(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the
computer.
5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
6 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
70
KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:
Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the
computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*
RS-232 Config/Access Control: The device is
ready to be configured via serial commands through
the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP
Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can
enable / disable control privileges of the connected
receivers.
Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control
of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the
computer is locked.
Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will
work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
Chapter 1. Introduction
71
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
7 Console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in
here.
11 power jack (KE9950T
only)
Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
72
KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View
No. Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when
the Ethernet connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM
access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access
of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest
possible grade so that images are optimized. This
toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.
Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is
optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns
off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
1432
Graphics OSD Video
POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE
56 7 8
Chapter 1. Introduction
73
KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View
No. Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as
the end of a paper clip.
Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device
while pressing reset to recover from a firmware
upgrade failure.
Press and hold it in for more then three seconds
resets the unit back to its factory default
settings*.
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything
but the login information (username/password) to the factory
default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset
All Information on page 381.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers
(green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral
device.
Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this
port, see USB Mode, page 224.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:
Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to
RX extension mode.
RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be
configured via serial commands through the RS-232
port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial
terminal.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
74
PoE Power Redundancy
For power redundancy with PoE-enabled models, the unit’s underside label
must be printed with a “Power Board Version: B01G” string. An example is
shown below and the string is indicated in the diagram:
8 console ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into
these ports.
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in
here.
This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power
redundancy or cable management.
*Requires power board version B01G or later (see
PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that
connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in
here.
12 power jack (KE9950R
only)
Connect a second power source for power
redundancy.
No. Component Description
75
Chapter 2
Hardware Setup
Mounting
For convenience and flexibility, the transmitters can be mounted onto a system
racks or wall.
Note: Optional mounting options are available, refer to Optional Rack Mount
on page 372 for more information.
It is highly recommended to mount AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or
wall and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.
The following sections demonstrate how to mount transmitters using the
mounting kit provided.
1. Important safety information regard the placement of this device
is found on . Please review it before proceeding.
2. Make sure that the power of all devices to be connected is turned
off. You must unplug the power of any computers with Keyboard
Power-on function.
3. Please operate the device with caution when under high
environmental temperatures, as the surface of the device may
become overheated under such conditions. For instance, the
surface temperature of the device may reach 70 ºC or higher when
the environmental temperature reaches close to 50 ºC.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
76
Attaching the Mounting Bracket
Follow the steps below to attach the mounting bracket to the unit:
Non-Slim Transmitters
Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,
KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,
KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same,
and are exemplified using KE6900.
1. Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.
2. Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of
the transmitter, as shown below.
M3 x 5
M3 x 5
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
77
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST
Using the screws from in the mounting kit, attach the mounting bracket to the
bottom of the transmitter as shown below.
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST
The following diagrams are exemplified using KE8900ST.
1. Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.
M3 x 5
M3 x 5
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
78
2. Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of
the transmitter, as shown below.
M3 x 5
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
79
Rack Mount
Non-Slim Transmitters
Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,
KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,
KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same,
and are exemplified using KE6900.
Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.
Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12
Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
80
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST
Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.
Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12
Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST
Screw the mounting bracket on any convenient location of the rack.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
81
Wall Mount
Non-Slim Transmitters
Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,
KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,
KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same,
and are exemplified using KE6900.
Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
82
Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST
Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST
Use the mounting bracket’s center screw hole to mount the unit onto a wall.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
83
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE6900 / KE6940 system in a point-to-point configuration is
simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,
microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE6900T / KE6940T. Each port is labeled a corresponding icon for
identification.*
2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of
the KE6900T / KE6940T.
3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,
mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900T / KE6940T’s LAN port.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the
KE6900T / KE6940T’s power jack.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE6900R / KE6940R.**
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900R / KE6940R's
LAN port.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end
into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.
10. Power on the computer.
Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second
DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940
and computer.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
85
Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940
installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be
connected at each end for a dual-display setup.
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to
a serial device (optional).
2
USB KVM
cable
Local PC
3
4
KE6900T
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
86
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE6900A / KE6940A system in a point-to-point configuration
is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender’s grounding
terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial
devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter
(KE6900AT/KE6940AT)
1
.
3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the
transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,
video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.
7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports
on the console section of the receiver (KE6900AR/KE6940AR)
2
.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect
the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the
transmitter and receiver’s SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit
Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules
3
.
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug
the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC
sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter
and receiver’s power jacks.
12. Power on the computer.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
87
Note: 1. If installing the KE6940A with two DVI monitors, connect the second
DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940
and computer.
2. A keyboard or mouse with special functions may be required to be
connected using the USB ports for the functions to work (see USB
Mode, page 224).
3. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact
your ATEN dealer for product information.
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
KE6900AR (Rear)
KE6900AT (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
2
7
10
6
9
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
98
10
1
11
DC 5V
DC 5V
1
11
Serial
Device
Serial
Device
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
88
Note: The diagram above shows KE6900AT and KE6900AR. The KE6940A
installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be
connected at each end for a dual-display setup.
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to
a serial device (optional).
KE6900AT (Front)
5
3
4
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
89
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE6940AiT system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a
matter of plugging in the cables. Since this is a transmitter-receiver setup, the
below steps are demonstrated using a KE6940AR.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack
or wall, and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extenders’ grounding
terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and
serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter
(KE6900AiT/KE6940AiT).
3. Connect the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the DVI-D cable
(KE6940AiT only) provided into the KVM ports on the front of the
transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the
DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker,
and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the
ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6940AR is used as the
example here)
1
.
7. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver’s LAN port.
9. To allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording, use an Ethernet
cable to connect the unit’s Ethernet port to a network switch.
10. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect
the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the
transmitter and receiver’s SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit
Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules
2
.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
90
11. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug
the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.
12. (Optional) For power redundancy, connect another power adapter
(available for purchase separately) to the power jack of each extender and
make sure the adapter is powered.
13. Power on the computer.
Note: 1. For the advanced features of connecting a keyboard or mouse with
special functions, see USB Mode, page 224.
2. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact
your ATEN dealer for product information.
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
KE6940AR (Rear)
KE6940AiT (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
2
6
11
10 7
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
8
11
1
12
DC 12V
DC 5V
1
Serial
Device
Serial
Device
Office LAN
9
10
DC 12V
12
DC 5V
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
91
Note: The diagram above shows a KE6940AiT installation with KE6940AR.
The KE6900AiT installation is the same except with one less DVI
monitor.
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to
a serial device (optional).
KE6940AiT (Front)
5
3
4
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
92
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE6910 / KE6912 system in a point-to-point configuration is
simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. (Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender’s grounding
terminal to a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial
devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of
the KE6910T / KE6912T.
3. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the
KVM ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T / KE6912T.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,
video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910T / KE6912T’s LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial
devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of
the KE6910R / KE6912R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R / KE6912R's
LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect
the KE6910 / KE6912 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules
into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug
the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.
The KE6912 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be
supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power
adapter.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
93
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC
sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter
and receiver’s power jacks.**
12. Power on the computer.
Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your
ATEN dealer for product
information.
2. Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power
adapter with the power cord
is sold separately. Contact your ATEN
dealer for product information. Power redundancy for
KE6912T and
KE6912R can be achieved with the PoE function.
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
94
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
95
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE6920 / KE6922 system in a point-to-point configuration is
simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender’s grounding
terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial
devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6920T/
KE6922T).
3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the
transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,
video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.
7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports
on the console section of the receiver (KE6920R/KE6922R).
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect
the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the
transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit
Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules
1
.
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug
the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC
sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter
and receiver’s power jacks
2
.
12. Power on the computer.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
96
Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your
ATEN dealer for product
information.
2. Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power
adapter with the power cord
is sold separately. Contact your ATEN
dealer for product information. Power redundancy for
KE6922T and
KE6922R can be achieved with the PoE function.
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
KE6920R (Rear)
KE6920T (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
2
7
10
69
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
9
8
10
1
11
DC 5V
DC 5V
1
11
Serial
Device
Serial
Device
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
97
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
KE6920T (Front)
5
3
4
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
98
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE8950 / KE8952 system in a point-to-point configuration is
simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to
indicate its function.
2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided into the KVM ports on the
front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.
3. Connect the other end of the USB HDMI KVM cable into the keyboard,
video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950T / KE8952T’s LAN port, or a
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the
KE8950T / KE8952T’s power jack.*
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE8950R / KE8952R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950R / KE8952R's
LAN port; or the other end of the Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber
cable to the SFP port.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end
into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.*
10. Power on the computer.
Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact
your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
99
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE8952. Please contact your
ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power
over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE8952.
KE8950R (Rear)
6
KE8950T (Rear)
8
5
1
Cat 5e/6 Cable
7
Optical Fiber Cable
Cat 5e/6 Cable Optical Fiber Cable
9
DC 5V
DC 5V
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
100
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to
a serial device (optional).
2
USB HDMI KVM
Cable
Local PC
3
4
KE8950T (Front)
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
101
KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation
The KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving alternative
for installations with transmitters that don’t need a local console or audio
transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.
Setting up the KE6900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a
matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off.
Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:
1. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable (provided with this package) to the
USB and DVI-D ports on the front of the KE6900ST.
2. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable to USB and DVI
video ports on the computer.
3. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the
KE6900ST to a serial port on the computer.
4. Plug the power adapter (provided with this package) into an AC source,
and plug the other end into the KE6900ST’s power jack.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900ST’s LAN port.
6. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE69x0R’s* LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, and DVI monitor into the
ports on the console section of the KE69x0R.*
8. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end
into the KE69x0R’s power jack.
9. Power on the computer.
Note: KE69x0R units are required and sold separately.
Setting up a LAN Installation
Setting up the KE6900ST on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-
multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by
connecting multiple KE69x0 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a
LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5 above) to the
network instead of directly between two KE69x0 devices and see KE6900 /
KE6940 LAN Installation, page 110 for details.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
102
1
USB KVM
cable
Local PC
3
2
KE6900ST (Front) KE6900ST (Rear)
KE6900R
5
Cat 5e/5 cable
4
6
8
7
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
103
KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation
The KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender is a cost-saving alternative
for installations that don’t need a local console or audio transmission but want
the connectivity features of advanced KE models.
Setting up the KE8900S system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a
matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off.
Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminals of KE8900ST and KE8900SR
to a suitable grounded object using grounding wires.
2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided between a computer and
the KE8900ST. Please use the USB Type-B end of the USB HDMI KVM
cable for the KE8900ST as it has a USB Type-B port.
3. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE8900ST and
KE8900SR.
4. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard to the front panel of the KE8900SR and
HDMI monitor to the rear panel of the KE8900SR.
5. Plug the power adapters into power sockets, and plug the other ends
respectively into the KE8900ST and KE8900SR’s power jacks. For
KE8900ST, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input.
Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the terminal block according to
the icon.*
6. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on
the KE8900ST to a serial port on the computer.
7. Power on the computer.
Setting up a LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN
installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 3) to the network instead
of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to
KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
104
KE8900SR (Rear)
KE8900SR (Front)
KE8900ST (Rear)
DC 5V
DC 5V
4
5
6
5
1
1
2
3
4
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
105
KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation
The KE9900ST DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving
alternative for installations with transmitters that don’t need a local console or
audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.
Setting up the KE9900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a
matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off.
Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminal of the KE9900ST to a suitable
grounded object using a grounding wire.
2. Connect the supplied DisplayPort cable between the DisplayPort ports of
the computer and the KE9900ST.
3. With the supplied USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable, connect the USB
Type-A end to the computer and the Type-B end to the KE9900ST.
4. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on
the KE9900ST to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE9900ST and the
receiver unit* (e.g. KE8900SR).
6. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard and HDMI monitor to their respective
ports on the KE8900SR.
7. Power the KE8900SR (e.g. plugging power adapter between the unit and a
power socket).
8. Plug the power adapter into a power socket, and plug the other end into
KE9900ST’s power jack. Alternatively, you can choose to use the terminal
block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the
terminal block according to the icon.
9. Power on the computer.
Note: A KE Series receiver unit is required and sold separately.
Setting up a LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN
installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5) to the network instead
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
107
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation
Setting up the KE9950 / KE9952 system in a point-to-point configuration is
simply a matter of plugging in the cables.
Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams
on the next two pages and do the following:
1. (Optional) Connect the extender’s grounding terminal to a suitable
grounded object using the grounding wire.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor,
serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console
section of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
3. Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
provided with this package, and audio cables into the KVM ports on the
front of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
4. Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to
Type-B, and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and
microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950T / KE9952T’s LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor,
serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console
section of the KE9950R / KE9952R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R / KE9952R’s
LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect
the KE9950 / KE9952 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules
into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug
the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks, respectively.
The KE9952 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) where power can be
supplied through a PoE network switch instead of using a power adapter.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
108
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC
sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter
and receiver’s second power jacks.**
12. Power on the computer.
Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your
ATEN dealer for product
information.
2. Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power
adapter with the power cord
is sold separately. Contact your ATEN
dealer for product information. Power redundancy for
KE9952T and
KE9952R can be achieved with the PoE function.
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
109
Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE9952. Please contact your
ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power
over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE9952.
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a
serial device (optional).
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
110
KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE6900 / KE6900ST / KE6940 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN.
Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation
using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagram
on the following page, and do the following:
1. On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE6900T / KE6940T.* Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to
indicate itself.
2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of
the KE6900T / KE6940T.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
111
3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,
mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the
transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900T / KE6940T’s LAN port to
the local area TCP/IP network.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the
KE6900T / KE6940T’s power jack.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE6900R / KE6940R.**
8. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900R / KE6940R’s LAN port to
the local area TCP/IP network.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end
into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.
10. Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both
devices (See Network Configuration, page 133).
11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on
the network.
12. Power on the computer(s).
Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second
DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940
and computer.
2. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB
Mode, page 224.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
112
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940
installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be
connected at each end for a dual-display setup.
6
KE6900T
5
1
Cat 5e/6 cable
KE6900R
9
8
Cat 5e/6 cable
7
TCP/IP
LAN
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
113
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to
a serial device (optional).
2
USB KVM
cable
Local PC
3
4
KE6900T
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
114
KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we
recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports
are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you
use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to
switch to the LAN port’s network.
For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB
Mode, page 224.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
115
Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.
The installation is similar to that of KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point
Installation on page 86, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and
the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the
following page and connect accordingly.
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the
network, and then power on the computer(s).
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
TCP/IP
LAN
KE6900AT (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
DC 5V
Serial
Device
KE6900AR (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
DC 5V
Serial
Device
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
116
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
KE6900AT (Front)
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
117
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we
recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports
are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you
use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to
switch to the LAN port’s network.
For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB
Mode, page 224.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.
The installation is similar to that of KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point
Installation on page 89, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and
the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the
following page and connect accordingly.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
118
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the
network then power on the computer(s).
Note: If you wish to use CCVSR and/or remote access with WinClient/
JavaClient, you will still need to connect the Internet Port of the
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT to an office LAN.
It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack
or wall, and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
KE6940AR (Rear)
KE6940AiT (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
Cat 5e/6 cable
Optical Fiber Cable
DC 12V
DC 5V
Serial
Device
Serial
Device
Office LAN
DC 12V
DC 5V
TCP/IP
LAN
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
119
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
KE6940AiT (Front)
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
120
KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE6910 / KE6912 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the
setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.
The installation is similar to that of KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point
Installation on page 92, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and
the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the
following page and connect accordingly.
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the
network then power on the computer(s).
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
121
KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
KE6910R (Rear)
KE6910T (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
DC 5V
DC 5V
TCP/IP
LAN
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
122
KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
KE6910T (Front)
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
123
KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE6920 / KE6922 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the
setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.
The installation is similar to that of KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point
Installation on page 95, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and
the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the
following page and connect accordingly.
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the
network then power on the computer(s).
Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP
ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
124
that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for
the unit to switch to the LAN port’s network.
2. The KE6922’s LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE)
functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a
compatible PoE network switch.
3. Power adapters are not provided with KE6922 units. Please contact
your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the
Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE6922 units.
4. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB
Mode, page 224.
KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
TCP/IP
LAN
KE6920T (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
DC 5V
Serial
Device
KE6920R (Rear)
Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable
DC 5V
Serial
Device
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
125
KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
KE6920T (Front)
USB DVI-D KVM
cable
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
126
KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE8950 / KE8952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the
setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off.
Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:
1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,
microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to
indicate itself.
2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of
the KE8950T / KE8952T.
3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,
mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
127
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the
Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)
optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950T / KE8952T to
the local area TCP/IP network.**
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the
KE8950T / KE8952T’s power jack.***
7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,
microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the
KE8950R / KE8952R.****
8. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)
optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950R / KE8952R to
the local area TCP/IP network.**
9. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the
KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.***
10. Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both
devices (See Network Configuration, page 133).
11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on
the network.
12. Power on the computer(s).
Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP
ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note,
though, that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be
removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port’s network.
2. The KE8952’s LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE)
functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a
compatible PoE network switch.
3. Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact
your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the
Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.
4. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB
Mode, page 224.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
128
KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact
your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the
Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.
KE8950R (Rear)
6
KE8950T (Rear)
8
5
1
Cat 5e/6 Cable
7
Optical Fiber Cable
Cat 5e/6 Cable Optical Fiber Cable
9
DC 5V
DC 5V
TCP/IP
LAN
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
129
KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the
computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a
serial device (optional).
2
USB HDMI KVM
Cable
Local PC
3
4
KE8950T (Front)
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
130
KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation
Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting
multiple KE9950 / KE9952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the
setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our
performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).
A few points to note during your setup:
The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you
install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these
default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further
details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,
page 133, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds,
non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE
Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your
network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data
throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports
IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data
throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE
devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
Make sure that all equipment is powered off.
The installation is similar to that of KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point
Installation on page 83, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and
the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the
following page and connect accordingly.
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the
network then power on the computer(s).
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
131
KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
132
KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
133
Network Configuration
This section provides instructions to configure the network settings with a
fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. To use the IP Installer to
configure the IP address, see IP Installer, page 378.
Note: 1. Both devices are preconfigured with factory-default network settings.
If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to
change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses,
page 134, for further details.
2. In a network setup with multiple units, each transmitter and receiver
must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network
Configuration, page 133, for further details.
3. We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire
speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port)
between devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps
switches might cause poor performance.
4. In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of
your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the
deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3
switch that supports IGMP queries.
5. If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the
data throughput is sufficient.
6. To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network
for KE device, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
To configure the network settings, do the following:
1. Set up the hardware and connect the transmitter and receiver to the local
area network (see KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation, page 110, or
KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation, page 126).
2. From the receiver, tap [Scroll Lock] twice to invoke the OSD.
3. Select the Receiver or Transmitter from the sidebar menu.
4. Enter the password and click Configure.
The default password is: password.
5. From the Network tab, select Set IP address manually and enter the
following:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
134
IP Address — sets the IP address for the KE device. Key in a valid
unique IP address.
Note: See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for the preconfigured
factory-default settings.
Subnet Mask — sets the subnet mask for the KE device. Key in a valid
subnet mask value.
Note: The default setting is 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway — sets the default gateway for the KE device. Key in
a valid default gateway.
6. Click Save.
Exit OSD
To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard, click Logout; tap [Scroll Lock]
twice, or return to the OSD main page and press the front panel OSD
pushbutton (receiver only).
At this point, the receiver can connect to the transmitter to access the remote
computer (see OSD Matrix Mode, page 158 for instructions).
Default IP Addresses
The preconfigured factory-default IP addresses for the KE Series devices are
as follows:
Transmitters – 192.168.0.61
Receivers – 192.168.0.60
Chapter 2. Hardware Setup
135
KE I/O Ports
The following table provides the I/O port use of KE Series devices.
Device Port Number
KE Matrix Manager (TCP) HTTP 8080
HTTPS 8443
Device TCP 9110
CLI 9111
Redundancy 9120
Database Service 1527
KE Matrix Manager (UDP) Port 9110
Broadcast 9000
KE TX/RX Device (TCP) Manager 9110
Service 9000
Telnet 23
SSH 22
KE TX Device (TCP) VM 9001
vUSB 9002
Serial 9003
USB Access Mode 9009
KE RX Device (TCP) CLI 9130
KE TX/RX Device (UDP) Manager 9110
Service 9000
Array Mode 9120
Video 0xFE00(65024) - 0xFE03(65027)
Audio 0xFE04(65028) - 0xFE05(65029)
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
136
LED Display
Both the Transmitter and Receiver have front panel LEDs to indicate their
operating and power status, as explained in the table below:
LED Indication
LAN This LED indicates the network status.
Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet
connection is active:
Orange: 10 Mbps
Orange + Green: 100 Mbps
Green: 1000 Mbps
Off when not connected to the LAN.
Power
Lights blue when the unit is powered on.
OFF when power is off.
Local
Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM focus of the
computer
Remote
Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM focus of the
computer.
137
Chapter 3
OSD Operation
Overview
This chapter provides instructions to configure and operate KE Series devices
using the local On Screen Display (OSD). To configure the network settings
with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 133.
Invoking the OSD
The On Screen Display (OSD) is a keyboard/mouse-driven application on the
receiver used to configure the transmitter and receiver settings. Once the
receiver has discovered the transmitter over a network* or Ethernet cable
connection, you can use the OSD on the receiver to configure the transmitter.
To invoke the OSD, press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver, or
from the keyboard tap the Scroll Lock key twice. The OSD main page will
appear (see Press the Esc key to cancel., page 139).
To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard; click Logout; tap the Scroll
Lock key twice; or return to the OSD main page and press the OSD pushbutton
on the front of the receiver. The OSD disappears and the computer desktop
screen or the System Login prompt is displayed.
Note: 1. For the Receiver to discover the Transmitter over a network, both
must be on the same subnet of the LAN.
2. To change the OSD hotkeys, see page 157.
3. If the keyboard/mouse won’t work when the OSD is invoked, see
USB Mode, page 224.
Touch Screen Calibration
If you’re using a touch screen monitor and the OSD appears off center, you can
use the blinking
+
at each corner to adjust the position of the OSD.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
138
OSD Hotkeys
The OSD hotkeys navigate the Receiver’s OSD screens. The hotkeys work
after logging in from the System Login screen (see page 158) but not the OSD
Configuration screen. Pressing a hotkey will immediately take you to the
corresponding OSD screen.
Users can also use the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys to jump to the previous
and next configuration pages.
Non-OSD Hotkeys
The following are the hotkeys that can be used without entering the OSD
screen:
Reverting to Previous
Users can use the [Alt] + [K] hotkey to switch back to the transmitter channel
previously accessed.
Note: For KE6900 / KE8950 / KE9950, [Alt] + [K] is not supported, but the
same operation can be achieved by pressing [K] under Hotkey Mode.
Hotkey Mode
The Hotkey Mode allows users to quickly switch from one transmitter to
another. Either press [Num Lock] + [-] or [Ctrl] + [F12] to enter Hotkey Mode.
Once in Hotkey Mode, you can use the [Next Arrow] and [Previous Arrow]
keys to quickly switch between different transmitters. You can also press a
Hotkey OSD Screen Page
[F1] Connections Page 1 in List Mode 159
[F2] Connections Page 1 in Array Mode 162
[F3] Profile Page 1 164
[F5] Push Content Page 1 165
[F6] Pull Content Page 1 167
[F7] Receiver > Properties 142
[F8] User Preferences 157
[F9] OSD Login Screen
(logs user off)
158
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
139
[Number Key] + [S] / [O] / [E] / [V] to access a transmitter based on its order
number in Favorites (see page 160) by Share / Occupy / Exclusive / View Only
mode.
Microphone Hotkey
You can switch microphone access between Receivers with a hotkey:
1. Press and hold down [Num Lock].
2. Press and release [-].
3. Release [Num Lock].
4. Press 1.
Press the Esc key to cancel.
OSD Interface
After you invoke the OSD, the main page appears:
Note: A password is required to enter the OSD. The default password is:
password. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change
the password.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
140
The OSD components are described in the table below:
Logging in for the First Time
If you are the administrator, and are logging in for the first time (Receiver or
User Preference radio button), use the default password (password).
For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the login
password immediately as shown below:
Click OK and change the password in the dialog box shown below:
Enter the password and confirm it in the next field. The password must be
different from your original password.
No. Item Description
1 Receiver Select this radio button, enter a password, and click
Configure to enter the Receiver Configuration screen.
2 Transmitter Select this radio button, enter a password, and click
Configure to enter the Transmitter Configuration screen.
Note: Receiver must first discover the transmitter over the
network for this option to be available.
3 User Preferences Select this radio button, enter a password, and click
Configure to enter the User Preferences screen.
4 About About provides information regarding the OSD version.
5 Password Input the OSD password and click Configure to enter the
selected configuration screen. See note for password.
6 Configure After entering a password, click Configure to enter the
selected configuration screen.
7Back to
Connection
Clicking this button exits the OSD and returns you to the
computer’s video display.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
141
Receiver Configuration
Select the Receiver radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab
appears:
Network
The Network tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s IP address settings:
After entering the information, click Save.
Item Description
IP Installer The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for
assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio
buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP
Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.
Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to
View Only or Disable after each use.
Network
Configuration
For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain
IP address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and
fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.
For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see
Network Configuration, page 133.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
142
Properties
There are two versions of Properties for KE Series, a Regular Version, and a
Slim Version.
The Properties tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s settings.
Note: KE8900ST, KE8900SR, and KE9900ST are
Slim Version.
Regular Version
Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to
Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD
menu.
Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from
the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced
administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see
Browser / Telnet Operation, page 179).
Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP
address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232
source signals.
If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be
grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter
connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 179).
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
143
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The
default settings are:
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 bit
Flow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from
Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950
Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the
audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Manager
Address
Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running
the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is
9110.
Beeper Check this box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration
changes are made to it.
Touch Screen
Calibration
Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen
connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears,
touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is
complete.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
144
After entering the information, click Save.
USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:
Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB
disk into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data
transfer speeds but will not allow other USB devices plugged
into the USB ports to work. When Receivers connected to the
same transmitter mount or unmount USB disk drives, the
keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay.
Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual media connections at
the same time (keyboard/mouse included).
vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB
peripherals* into the USB ports. This option also allows a
keyboard and mouse with special functions to plug into the USB
ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the
keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged
into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are
plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD
menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and
mouse must be plugged into the console ports. KE6900ST/
KE8900ST/KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB
(Generic USB Device) mode. In this mode, KE6900/KE6940
transmitters supports up to 2 USB connections, KE8950/
KE8952 transmitters support up to 5 USB connections
(keyboard/mouse excluded), and KE8900SR supports 1 vUSB
connection.
Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into
the USB ports.
Receiver
Keyboard
Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the
Receiver’s language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Disable front
video button
You can enable or disable the function (select video mode or
graphic mode) of the video pushbutton on the front of the
receiver.
Check Disable to disable.
Uncheck Disable to enable.
Item Description
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
145
Slim Version
Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to
Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD
menu.
Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from
the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced
administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see
Browser / Telnet Operation, page 179).
Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP
address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232
source signals.
If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be
grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter
connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 179).
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The
default settings are:
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 bit
Flow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from
Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950
Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the
audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
146
After entering the information, click Save.
Manager
Address
Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running
the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is
9110.
Beeper Check this box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration
changes are made to it.
Touch Screen
Calibration
Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen
connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears,
touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is
complete.
USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:
Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB
disk into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data
transfer speeds but will not allow other USB devices plugged
into the USB ports to work. When Receivers connected to the
same transmitter mount or unmount USB disk drives, the
keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay.
Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual media connections at
the same time (keyboard/mouse included).
vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB
peripherals* into the USB ports. This option also allows a
keyboard and mouse with special functions to plug into the USB
ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the
keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged
into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are
plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD
menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and
mouse must be plugged into the console ports. KE6900ST/
KE8900ST/KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB
(Generic USB Device) mode. In this mode, KE6900/KE6940
transmitters supports up to 2 USB connections; and KE8950/
KE8952 transmitters support up to 5 USB connections
(keyboard/mouse excluded).
Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into
the USB ports.
Receiver
Keyboard
Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the
Receiver’s language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Video Quality
(KE8900ST /
8900SR /
9900ST)
You can select video mode or graphic mode for the video
qualtiy, the Slim Version KE Series does not have a phsycial
pushbutton on the front of the receiver.
Item Description
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
147
System
The System tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s general settings:
After entering the information, click Save.
Item Description
Device
Information
Enter the Name, and Description of the Receiver. It also
displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial
Number of the Receiver.
Reboot Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Receiver’s settings
back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login
information) will be lost.
Receiver
Password
Change
Check Enable to require a password for access to the
Receiver’s OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password,
enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the
Confirm Password box.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
148
Transmitter Configuration
When you select the Transmitter radio button and click Configure to login, the
Network tab appears:
Network
The Network tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s IP address settings:
After entering the information, click Save.
Item Description
IP Installer The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for
assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio
buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP
Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.
Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to
View Only or Disable after each use.
Network
Configuration
For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain
IP address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and
fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.
For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see
Network Configuration, page 133.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
149
Properties
The Properties tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s extender settings:
Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to
Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD
menu.
Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from
the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced
administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see
Browser / Telnet Operation, page 179).
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
150
Properties Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating
system of the computer connected to the Transmitter.
OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the
operating system language of the computer connected to the
Transmitter.
Enable Multicast Video: Check this box to allow a broadcast of
the Transmitter’s video signal to be sent out to multiple
Receivers.
Enable Multicast Audio: Check this box to allow a broadcast
of the Transmitter’s audio signal to be sent out to multiple
Receivers.
EDID Mode Selection: EDID contains a display's basic
information and is used by the source device to utilize the best
resolution across different monitors. When Manual or Remix is
selected, the Receiver’s OSD will have a button allowing the
local EDID setting to be configured for the connection. Select
how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:
Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This
setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to
KE8950 devices.
Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the
ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all
displays.
Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the
Connections Page (see page 159).
Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays
and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common
resolution for all displays (see page 159).
Enable Media Select which type of media the Transmitter can stream to
Receivers: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232.
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The
default settings are:
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 bit
Flow Control: None
Manager
Address
Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running
the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is
9110.
Item Description
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
151
After entering the information, click Save.
Transmitter
Video Attributes
To set the Transmitter’s video settings:
Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the
display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is available
for KE6900, KE6940, KE6900A, KE6940A units and will be
grayed out for other models.
Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color
depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe
the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of
colors that can be displayed at one time.
Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the
Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower
bandwidth setting transmits lower quality video; a higher
bandwidth setting sends higher quality video but this can affect
network speed.
Video Quality: Select the video quality to use. 5 is the highest
video quality, and 1 is the lowest video quality. Options are: 1~5.
Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter
refreshes the background image on the connected display.
Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
Beeper Check this box to allow the device to beep every time a
configuration change is made.
Occupy Timeout Set a time threshold for devices whose Access Mode has been
set to Occupy (see Access Type, page 219). If there is no
activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of
time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released.
The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the
port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value
from 1 to 240 seconds.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
152
System
The System tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s general settings:
After entering the information, click Save.
Item Description
Device
Information
Enter the Name and Description of the Transmitter. It also
displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial
Number of the Transmitter.
Reboot Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Transmitter’s
settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not
the login information) will be lost.
Transmitter
Password
Change
Check Enable to require a password for access to the
Transmitter’s OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old
Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new
password in the Confirm Password box.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
153
Internet Port (AiT Models only)
The Internet Port tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s Internet Port
settings:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
154
IP Installer
The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses
to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled,
or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 378 for IP Installer details.
Note: 1. If you select View Only, you will be able to see the transmitter in the
IP Installer’s Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP
address.
2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only
or Disabled after using it.
Service Ports
Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.
Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from
the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java
Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.
Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.
2. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a
different value for each one.
3. If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter
what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.
If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that
the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the
default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when
they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the
transmitter will not be found.
IPv4 Settings
The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up
(DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.
For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This
is the default setting.)
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
155
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the
IP address.
Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its
IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address
after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP
address, 192.168.0.61.
2. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network
addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP
installer. See IP Installer, page 378 for information.
The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,
or a fixed address can be specified.
For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS
server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually
radio button and fill in the required information.
Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.
IPv6 Settings
The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-
up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.
For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This
is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the
IP address.
The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,
or a fixed address can be specified.
For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS
server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually
radio button and fill in the required information.
Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
156
CCVSR
Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the
CCVSR program.
Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address
and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.
Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must different than
the one used for the Program port (see Service Ports, page 154).
Working Mode
Use this section to set the working mode parameters.
Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available
options are: browser, http or https.
Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When
enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the
WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 285). Disabling this
function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still
be connected to.
After entering the information, click Save.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
157
User Preferences
When you select the User Preferences radio button and click Configure to
login, the configuration screen appears:
When you have made your choices, Click Save.
Item Description
User Password
Change
This section allows you to change the OSD password:
1. Key in the old password in the Old password field.
2. Key in the new password in the New password field.
3. Key in the new password again in the Confirm password
field.
OSD Language Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to
use for OSD sessions. Choices are: English, Chinese
(Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, Korean, Dutch,
French, Spanish, Portuguese, and Russian.
OSD Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to invoke the OSD screen.
Logout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this
function, the user is automatically logged out of the OSD. A
login is necessary before the OSD can be accessed again.
Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the OSD waits when a session is idle
before turning off the display.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
158
OSD Matrix Mode
If you set the system to Matrix mode (in Properties), you will see the System
Login screen when you enter the invoke the OSD, which provides access to the
Connection Page by entering a username and password:
Note: 4. If the Receiver does not require a login, click Login to system (see
Login Required, under Basic, page 204).For information about
Extender and Desktop/Matrix modes, see Mode, page 142.
After you login the Connection Page appears, as shown on the next page.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
159
Connections Page
List Mode
The Connection Page components are described in the table below:
No. Item Description
1 Channel Name Lists the Channel connections available for the
Receiver. A Channel is a defined connection to
Transmitters, created in the Device Management tab
of the KE Matrix Manager (see Browser / Telnet
Operation, page 179).
2 Channel Status This field provides thestatus information of the
Channel, including the device name of the
receiver(s) currently accessing and its operation
mode.
Operation modes are abbreviated as S, O, E and E
for Share, Occupy, Exclusive and View Only,
respectively.
3 Search Search for transmitters based on the keyword(s)
entered.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
160
4 Connect To connect the Receiver to a Channel, click the
access type:
Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Channel
has exclusive control over the Channel. No other
Receivers can view the Channel. The Timeout
function does not apply to this setting.
Occupy: The first Receiver to access the Channel
has control over the Channel. However, additional
Receivers may view the Channel's video display. If
the Receiver controlling the Channel is inactive for
longer than the time set in the Timeout box, control
is transferred to the first Receiver to move the
mouse or strike the keyboard.
Share: Can simultaneously share control over the
Channel. Input from the Receivers is placed in a
queue and executed chronologically.
View Only: Receiver connects with view only access
to the Channels video display.
5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page
or to the end of the list if there are more Channels
available than can be seen on the page.
6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous
page or to the beginning of the list if there are more
Channels available than can be seen on the page.
7 Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as
favorites. Channels marked as favorites appear with
a heart icon.
To add/remove a Favorite, select a Channel and
then right click with the mouse to select Add to
Favorite or Remove from Favorite.
Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as
Favorites.
8 Array Mode Click to view the Channel connections with a video
preview of each source. The list will be shown in
groups of six at a time. The Array Mode is discussed
on page 162.
9 List Mode This option appears after selecting Array mode.
Click to view the Channel connections in a list that
can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first.
Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort.
No. Item Description
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
161
10 EDID Mode When a Transmitter's EDID is configured, depending
on its setting, different buttons will or won't appear to
configure the Receiver's EDID for the connection.
The following rules apply to the Receiver’s OSD
according to the Transmitter's EDID setting:
Under Default or Auto EDID mode, no EDID
button appears as there is nothing to configure.
Under Manual or Remix EDID mode, the EDID
button appears allowing you to select Manual
EDID or Remix EDID.
Click Manual or Remix to adjust the EDID setting
locally.
To set the Transmitter’s EDID Mode, see Properties,
page 150.
11 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
12 Go to Configuration
Window
Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.
No. Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
162
Array Mode
Note that Array Mode is not supported by slim KVM over IP Receivers.
In Array Mode the screen is divided into a grid of panels, with each panel
showing the video display of a particular Channel. Right-click a panel and
select a mode to connect: E: Exclusive, O: Occupy, S: Share, V: View Only,
X: Exit. While the mouse cursor hovers over a panel displaying video, if audio
is being sent from that Transmitter, it can be heard at the Receiver.
No. Item Description
1 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to
the end of the list if there are more Channels available
than can be seen on the page.
2 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page
or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels
available than can be seen on the page.
3 Grid Selection Select a range for how many Channels you want to
display. Options are: 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, and 6x6.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
163
4 Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as
favorites. Click All to list all Channels.
To add/remove a Favorite, go to List Mode, select a
Channel and then right click with the mouse to select
Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.
Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as
Favorites.
5 List Mode Click to view the Channel connections in a list that can
be sorted by name or with favorites listed first. Click the
Channel Name heading to change the sort. List Mode is
discussed on page 160.
6 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
10 Configure Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.
No. Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
164
Profile Page
Click the Profile Page tab and the following screen appears:
The Profile Page components are described in the table below:
No. Item Description
1 Name Lists the Profiles available. Profiles give Receivers access
to Channels and allow you to push the connection.
2 Description The field provides a description of the Profile that was
entered when it was created.
3 Connect Click Connect and the Receiver will connect with the
settings of that Profile (see Adding a Profile, page 243).
4 Disconnect Click Disconnect to end the current Profile connection.
5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to
the end of the list if there are more Profiles available than
can be seen on the page.
6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or
to the beginning of the list if there are more Profiles
available than can be seen on the page.
7 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
8 Go to Configuration
Window
Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
165
Push Content
Push Content allows you to push the Receiver’s computer connection to
another Receiver’s console, allowing both to access to the computer. Select the
Push Content tab and the following screen appears:
The Push Content Page components are described in the table, below:
No. Item Description
1 Receiver Name Lists the Receivers that can be selected to push the
local Receiver’s computer connection to.
2 Description The field provides a description of the Receiver that
was entered when it was created.
3 Connect Click Push Content to push the local Receiver’s
computer connection to the selected Receiver’s
console. The local Receiver’s computer connection
will appear on the Receiver that it was pushed to and
both will share access to the computer. The access
mode selected at the local Receiver will determine
how access is shared (see Transmitter Permissions,
page 218 for details).
5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page
or to the end of the list if there are more choices
available than can be seen on the page.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
166
6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous
page or to the beginning of the list if there are more
choices available than can be seen on the page.
9 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
10 Go to Configuration
Window
Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.
No. Item Description
Chapter 3. OSD Operation
167
Pull Content
Pull Content allows you to pull a Receiver’s computer connection to the local
Receiver’s console, allowing both to access to the computer. Click the Pull
Content tab and the following screen appears:
The Pull Content Page components are described in the table, below:
No. Item Description
1 Receiver Name Lists the Receiver names currently connected to the
Channel listed under Channel Status.
2 Channel Status Lists the name, description and access type of each
available Channel connection.
3 Connect Click Pull Content and the Receiver will pull the
Channel connection to the local console using the
access mode displayed under Channel Status.
5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page
or to the end of the list if there are more choices
available than can be seen on the page.
6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous
page or to the beginning of the list if there are more
choices available than can be seen on the page.
9 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
10 Go to Configuration
Window
Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
168
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
169
Chapter 4
Software Installation
Overview
The CCKM KE Matrix Manager Software is a browser based GUI that provides
management of KE Series devices over a network. You can download the KE
Matrix Manager Software for free and manage up to 8 KE devices, or purchase
a license for the KE Matrix Manager Software. To purchase a license, contact
your local authorized ATEN dealer. To download the free KE Matrix Manager
Software, use the instructions below.
Download
To download the KE Matrix Manager software, do the following:
1. Visit our website and click Support & Downloads
→
ESERVICE.
2. Under Account, click Create New or Log In.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
170
3. After logging in, click Product Registration to register the KE device(s)
you have purchased.
4. After you have registered the KE device(s), click Trial Software
Download.
Note: The downloaded version of the KE Matrix Manager software
includes full functions and can configure up to 8 KE Series devices.
If you would like to configure more KE Series devices, please
contact your ATEN reseller to purchase a license and upgrade the
license of your software, see page 174.
5. Click the software version you would like to download, then click Save.
6. Unzip the cckm_win_Vx.x.xxx.zip or cckm_linux_Vx.x.xxx.zip file and
double click the *.exe file to start the installation.
7. Follow the instructions on the next page to install the software.
Chapter 4. Software Installation
171
KE Matrix Manager Software Install
The following are instructions to install the full version of the KE Matrix
Manager software on a primary or secondary computer. For software
requirements, see CCKM Requirements, page 10.
1. Insert the USB license key into a USB port on your computer.
Note: If you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup, a USB
license key is required to install the KE Matrix Manager.
2. Double click the KEMatrixManagerSetup file to start the setup. When the
Introduction screen appears, click Next.
3. The License Agreement appears:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
172
If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of
the license agreement, and click Next.
4. The Choose Install Folder screen appears:
Select where you would like to install the program, and click Next.
5. The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears:
Select where to create shortcuts for the program by selecting the options
provided, and click Next.
Chapter 4. Software Installation
173
6. The Pre-Installation Summary screen appears:
Confirm the settings you’ve selected. If you want to make a change
click Previous to go back, or click Install to begin the software
installation.
7. When the process is done, the Install Complete screen appears:
Click Done.
Chapter 4. Software Installation
175
Linux Installation
The following are instructions to install the full version of the KE Matrix
Manager software on a Linux server. For software requirements, see CCKM
Requirements, page 10.
1. Download the KE Matrix Manager installation file to the Linux server.
2. Change the properties of the installation file so that its executable by
running the command: chmod a+x filename
Example: chmod a+x kemanager_setup.bin
3. Start the installation with the command:
sudo sh ./kemanager_setup.bin
4. When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.:
5. The License Agreement appears:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
176
If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of
the license agreement, and click Next.
6. When the Choose Install Folder screen appears, select the location and
continue through the installation by clicking Next.
7. After the software installs successfully, a directory provides useful links:
8. The "Uninstall_Matrix_Manager" can be used to uninstall the software.
By default the root folder can be accessed as shown below:
sudo –i cd /root cd KeManager sudo ./Uninstall_Matrix_Manager
9. To check and stop the KE Matrix Manager service, use the following
commands:
cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service
Stop service:
sudo ./Stop_Service
Chapter 4. Software Installation
177
10. To check and start the KE Matrix Manager service, use the following
commands:
cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service
Stop service:
sudo ./Start_service
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
178
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
179
Chapter 5
Browser / Telnet Operation
Overview
The CCKM KE Matrix Manager software can be accessed through most
standard web browsers and via Telnet. Once users log in and are authenticated,
the browser GUI comes up. The first section explains the login procedure and
web browser components. The last section provides details for connecting via
Telnet.
Logging In
To log into the KE Matrix Manager, do the following:
1. Open the browser and specify the IP address of the computer installed with
the KE Matrix Manager software, in the browser’s URL location bar.
Note: If the administrator has configured the HTTP or HTTPS port setting
as something other than the default, you must include http:// or
https:// before the IP address, and specify the port number along
with the IP address. For example:
https://192.168.1.20:8443
Where 8443 is the https port number, or 8080 is the http port
number, and a colon is inserted between it and the IP address.
2. If a Security Alert box appears, accept the certificate – it can be trusted
(See Trusted Certificates, page 379 for details). The Login page appears:
3. Enter the Username and Password and click Login.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
180
Note: Only administrator accounts can be used to log in. By default, the
username and password are administrator and password,
respectively.
4. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password
immediately.
Click OK for the password change dialog box.
5. Enter the new password and confirm it by entering the password again.
6. Click OK to complete the change and the KE matrix manager main page
appears. Refer to the next page for more details.
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
181
The KE Matrix Manager Main Page
After you have successfully logged in, the web browser’s main page appears:
Web Components
The web components are described in the table below:
No. Item Description
1 Install Wizard This icon helps you locate Transmitters/Receivers
on the LAN to add them to the KE Matrix Manager
(see Installation Wizard, page 183). If a device can’t
be found, check the Network settings in the device’s
OSD menu (see page 141 & 148).
2 System Settings Click this icon to enter the System Setting section
where you can configure the KE Matrix Manager
software. The Settings are discussed on page 249.
3 Logout Click this button to log out of your KE Matrix
Manager web session.
4 Interactive Display Panel This is your main work area. Scroll the page up or
down to view the various selections. Some items can
be clicked to open a settings page, while others
provide status information.
5 Instant Link Clicking this icon opens the lower bar which allows
you to instantly connect KE devices. Instant Link is
discussed on page 189.
2
3
5
1
4
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
182
Interactive Display Panel
The functions associated with each of the icons on the main interactive display
panel are explained in the table below:
Icon Function
System Status: System Status provides an overview of the
transmitter, receiver, user, profile, and log status. Each heading can
be clicked to open the respective settings page. System Status is
discussed on page 197.
Connections: Connections provides a visual display of current
transmitter and receiver connections. Connections is discussed on
page 273.
Scheduled Profile: Scheduled Profile provides an overview of
connection profiles that are scheduled to run. Scheduled Profile is
discussed on page 277.
Sessions: Sessions provides a list of current user sessions.
Sessions is discussed on page 279.
Refresh: The Refresh button provides a way to update the
information currently being displayed on the page.
To Top: This button appears at the bottom right corner of the
Interactive Display Panel and allows you to jump back to the top of
the page.
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
183
Installation Wizard
Use the Install Wizard to add transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches
to the CCKM. The wizard locates devices on the network and walks you
through adding them. To add devices, do the following:
1. Connect all transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches to the LAN.
2. On the CCKM main page, click the Install Wizard icon (page 181). This
dialog box appears.
To add transmitters and/or receivers, select Transmitter or Receiver,
click Next, and refer to Adding Transmitters and Receivers, page 184.
To add network switches, select Network Switch, click Next, and
refer to Adding Network Switches, page 187.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
184
Adding Transmitters and Receivers
1. On the installation wizard for transmitters and receivers, select options to
locate the devices:
2. Check the boxes under Transmitter / Receiver to select the devices you
want to add, then click Next.
3. Under Assign IP Address select an option to configure the network
settings, then click Next.
Item Description
Search Local Check this box and click the Refresh button to search the
local area network for Transmitters/Receivers.
Search Subnet Check this box, enter a subnet IP and then click the
Refresh button to search the subnet for Transmitters/
Receivers.
Transmitter / Receiver Displays the number of Transmitters and Receivers that
have been discovered on the network. Use the check
boxes next to the Transmitters/Receivers to select the
devices you want to add.
The Refresh button provides a way to update the
information currently being displayed in the install wizard
window.
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
185
4. Use the Naming Rule radio button to create a naming convention (Title +
Number); or Use Original Name to use the name currently configured on
the Transmitter/Receiver, then click Next.
Item Description
IP Range Select the IP Range radio button to enter a series of
static IP addresses to assign to the Transmitters/
Receivers that you are adding.
DHCP Select the DHCP radio button for dynamic IP address
assignment.
Use Original IP Setting Select this radio button to use the IP address currently
configured on the Transmitter/Receiver.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
186
5. Confirm each Transmitter’s Name, IP Address, Audio setting and check
the boxes to set Permissions*, then click Next and repeat the process for
Receivers.
Note: See Transmitter Permissions, page 218, and Receiver Permissions,
page 230 for information about setting permissions.
6. Click Done.
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
187
Adding Network Switches
1. On the installation wizard for network switches, specify the search
parameters to locate the devices:
2. Check the boxes next to the network switch devices you want to add.
Item Description
IP Range Specify the IP address range to search for the network
switch to be added.
Switch Manufacturer Selects the manufacturer of the network switch to be
added.
Search via SNMP v1 / v2c /
v3
Select to search via SNMP v1 / v2c / v3 by entering the
corresponding Port, Community / Username and Timeout
parameters
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
188
3. Optionally modify the Device Name of the network switch(es) to be added,
then click Next.
4. For optimal working with the KE Matrix System, make sure to enable the
related network services and click Next.
5. Click Done to finish.
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
189
Instant Link
At the bottom of the KE Matrix Manager Main Page is the Instant Link bar. In
this section you can quickly connect Receivers to Transmitters.
The top panel provides the Receiver List, and the bottom panel provides the
Transmitter List. To create a connection, click a Receiver in the top panel and
use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter (as shown in the image below);
or drag-and-drop Transmitters from the bottom panel to Receivers in the top
panel. Configure as many Receiver to Transmitter connections as needed, and
then click Apply.
Item Description
Instant Link The Instant Link bar provides access to quickly connect
Receivers to Transmitters. Click the bar to open the
panel, click again to minimize the panel. The top panel
provides a list of all the Receivers discovered on the
LAN.Click a Receiver and use the drop-down menu to
select a Transmitter.
Transmitter List Click the Transmitter List bar to open the panel. The
panel provides a list of all the Transmitters discovered on
the LAN. Drag-and-drop Transmitters in the bottom panel
to Receivers in the top panel to establish connections.
The panel size of the Transmitter List is adjustable by
clicking-and-dragging its border.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location to filter the
Receivers or Transmitters displayed on the page.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
190
Ratio Use the drop-down list to adjust the icon size of the
Receivers / Transmitters.
Click and type keywords to filter/search for Receivers /
Transmitters.
Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Access Mode Click a device and use the drop-down box to set the
access mode: Occupy, View Only, or Exclusive.
Auto Apply Checking this box allows you to drag and drop devices
and apply the connection immediately without having to
click the Apply button.
Apply Click Apply to connect the devices.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without connecting.
Item Description
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
191
RS-232 / Telnet
The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session
using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first
set up and connected to the network.
Telnet
To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the
following:
1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.
2. At the prompt, key in the KE device’s IP address with port 23 in the
following way:
telnet [IP address] [port]
3. Please press “T / t” to start “TextMenu” The login screen appears. At the
login prompt, provide the Password.
Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
192
RS-232
To log into the KE Series device by means of a RS-232 session, do the
following:
1. The controller’s serial port should be configured the same as the
Receiver’s default configuration, as shown below:
The Receiver’s Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 44).
Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KE
Matrix Manager software on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the
Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure
the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.
2. Please press “T / t” to start “TextMenu” The login screen appears. At the
login prompt, provide the Password.
Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
193
Configuration Menu
Once a Telnet connection to the KE device is established, the device’s text-
based Configuration Menu comes up, allowing you to select options by
entering a number on the following screens:
Main Menu
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
KE6900 Receiver
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Receiver Configuration
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
1. Network
2. Properties
3. System
Q. Logout
Select one:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
194
1. Network
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
KE6900 Receiver
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Network Settings
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
1. IP Installer [Enabled]
2. DHCP [Disabled]
3. IP Address [172.17.17.34]
4. Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0]
5. Default Gateway [172.17.17.254]
Q. Exit
Select one:
2. Properties
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
KE6900 Receiver
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Device Properties
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
1. Mode [Matrix]
2. Transmitter Video IP Address [172.17.17.35]
3. Transmitter Audio IP Address [172.17.17.35]
4. Transmitter USB IP Address [172.17.17.35]
5. Transmitter RS232 IP Address [172.17.17.35]
6. UART Configuration
7. Video [Enabled]
8. Audio [Enabled]
9. USB [Enabled]
10. RS232 [Enabled]
11. KE Matrix Manager IP [172.17.17.33]
12. KE Matrix Manager Port [9110]
13. Beeper [Enabled]
14. USB Mode [VM]
15. USB Secure Transmit [Disabled]
Q. Exit
Select one:
Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation
195
3. System
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
KE6900 Receiver
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
System Setting
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
1. Device Name [KE6900R]
2. Device Description [Receiver1]
Device IP Address: 172.17.17.34
Device MAC Address: 00:10:74:A8:01:23
Device FW Version: V1.1.109
Device Serial Number:
3. Password [Enabled]
4. Change Password
5. System Reboot/Reset to Factory Default
Q. Exit
Select one:
Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login
information to the factory default settings. To reset the login
information, refer to Reset All Information on page 381.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
196
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Chapter 6. System Status
197
Chapter 6
System Status
Overview
The System Status panel is found at the top of the KE Matrix Manager main
page. This section provides status information about Transmitters, Receivers,
Network Switches, Users, Profiles, and Logs. Click on a selection to open a
Settings page, which are discussed in the sections that follow.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
198
System Status
The System Status panel contains six sections that provide information and a
link to each settings page. Each settings page can be accessed by Clicking
within the section: Transmitter, Receiver, Switch, Users, Profile, or Log. Each
section is explained in the table below and the Settings on the pages that follow.
Item Description
Transmitter This section provides an overview of the Transmitters
added to the KE Matrix Manager:
Active: Shows the number of Transmitters that are
currently online and connected to a Receiver.
Standby: Shows the number of Transmitters that are
online but not connected to a Receiver.
Offline: Shows the number of Transmitters added to
the KE Matrix Manager that are not online.
Total: Displays the total number of Transmitters added
to the KE Matrix Manager.
Receiver This section provides an overview of the Receivers
added to the KE Matrix Manager:
Active: Shows the number of Receivers that are
currently online and connected to a Transmitter.
Standby: Shows the number of Receivers that are
online but not connected to a Transmitter.
Offline: Shows the number of Receivers added to the
KE Matrix Manager that are not online.
Total: Displays the total number of Receivers added to
the KE Matrix Manager.
Chapter 6. System Status
199
Switch This section provides an overview of the Network
Switches added to the KE Matrix Manager:
Active: Shows the number of Network Switches added
to the KE Matrix Manager that are currently online.
Offline: Shows the number of Network Switches
added to the KE Matrix Manager that are not online.
Total: Displays the total number of Network Switches
added to the KE Matrix Manager.
Users This section provides an overview of users with KE
Matrix Manager sessions:
Online: Shows the number of users that are logged
into OSD or KE Matrix Manager web sessions.
Idle: Shows the number of users not logged into OSD
or KE Matrix Manager web sessions.
Profile This section provides an overview of Profile and Profile
Schedules:
Total: Shows the total number of Profiles available.
Next scheduled to run: Shows the name of the next
Profile scheduled to run.
Days later: Shows the number of days until the next
Profile is scheduled to run.
Log This section provides an overview of system logs:
Warning: Shows the number of warnings logs
generated since the event log was cleared.
Error: Shows the number of error logs generated since
the event log was cleared.
Information: Shows the number of information logs
generated since the log was cleared.
Redundancy Status This section provides information about the Redundancy
mode. The first set of brackets shows which server is
hosting the KE Matrix Manager database: [Primary] or
[Secondary]. If Redundancy is disabled the first bracket
will read: [Standalone]. The second set of brackets show
the status:
[Working]: The server is actively hosting the KE Matrix
Manager database.
[Standby]: This message appears when database
operations are idle.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
200
Transmitter
Click Transmitter in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page
you can add, delete and configure Transmitters (physical transmitters), Virtual
Transmitters (multi-source) and Transmitter Groups (multi-video source). The
KE Matrix Manager automatically adds Transmitters connected to the local
area network with a valid IP address.
The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let
you view and configure Transmitters.
Active refers to a Transmitter connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Transmitter connection that is online.
Offline refers to a Transmitter connection that is offline.
Use this drop-down menu to filter Transmitters by
location. Use Locations to limit the Transmitters seen on the page.
Click to add a new Location.
Select a Transmitter and click the Move to icon to add
devices to a Location.
Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this
icon to delete it.
Chapter 6. System Status
201
Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.
/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Transmitters.
Click an option to have selected Transmitters:
Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Transmitter and paste
them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 213).
Reboot: Shut down and restart.
Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.
Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login
information to the factory default settings. To reset the login
information, refer to Reset All Information on page 381.
Click to Create Virtual TX or Create TX Group (page 214 & 217).
Click to set Transmitter permissions (page 218).
Click to search for Transmitters.
Click to filter Transmitters shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.
SFP Module Detection
When an SFP module is used on the Transmitter added, the CCKM can
automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as
exemplified below.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
202
Transmitter Configuration
When the KE Matrix Manager discovers Transmitters on the network they
appear on the Transmitter settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to
configure its settings.
Note: For transmitter models with Internet Port (AiT models), the settings
page above is under the “Main” tab. An extra “Internet Port” tab is
available. For more information, refer to Internet Port (AiT models
only) on page 207.
Chapter 6. System Status
203
Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Transmitter.
Description: Enter a description for the Transmitter.
Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the
device. Locations filter the Transmitters seen on the settings page.
Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Transmitter will be
installed and managed:
Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to
Receiver) setups that are managed at the Receiver’s OSD
menu.
Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over
the LAN from the KE Matrix Manager software. This mode is for
advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver
connections configured within the KE Matrix Manager Web GUI.
Enable Media: Select which source type the Transmitter can
stream: Video, Audio, USB and RS232.
Audio Input: Use this option to select the Transmitter’s audio
source signal: HDMI, Analog, or Auto. This setting should reflect
the audio setting configured on the computer.*
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
204
Basic EDID Mode: EDID contains a display's basic information and is
used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across
different monitors. When Manual or Remix is selected, the
Receiver’s OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting
to be configured for the connection (see EDID Mode, page 161).
Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's
EDID:
ATEN Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration.
This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to
KE8950 devices.
Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN
default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.
Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the
Receiver’s OSD (see EDID Mode, page 161).
Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and
the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all
displays (see EDID Mode, page 161).
Multicast Video: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the
Transmitter’s video signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.
Multicast Audio: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the
Transmitter’s audio signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.
Occupy Timeout: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose
Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from
the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here,
the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first
Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has
been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to
240 seconds.
Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system
on the computer connected to the Transmitter.
OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating
system language on the computer connected to the Transmitter.
CCKM IP: Set the IP address and Port number of the computer
running the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number
is 9110.
IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility
for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to
select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility.
See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
205
Video Settings These refer to the Transmitter’s video settings:
Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the
display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is only
available for KE6900 units.
Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth:
24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of
a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can
be displayed at one time.
Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the
Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower
bandwidth transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth sends
higher quality video but this can affect network speed.
Video Quality: Select the video quality to use, with the highest to
lowest quality being Lossless > Light Compression > Medium
Compression > Heavy Compression > Maximum Compression.
Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes
the background image on the connected display. Options are to
refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.
To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway
select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values
appropriate for your network.
For information to configure the network settings locally on the
device, see Network Configuration, page 133.
Password
Protection
Select Enable to require a password to access the Transmitter’s
OSD configuration screens (see page 141).
Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default
settings are:
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 bit
Flow Control: None
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
206
Replace Device Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old
Transmitter with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old
Transmitter to the new Transmitter. Before using this feature,
connect the new Transmitter to the network. After clicking Replace
Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Transmitter
where the settings will be applied.
Note:
1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.
2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and
Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a
similar model.
Save Click Save to save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
207
Internet Port (AiT models only)
For transmitter models (AiT models) with Internet Port, an “Internet Port tab”
is available for configuration.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
208
Basic
IP Installer
The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses
to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled,
or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 378 for IP Installer details.
Note: 1. If you select View Only, you will be able to see the transmitter in the
IP Installer’s Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP
address.
2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only
or Disabled after using it.
Ports
Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.
Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from
the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java
Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.
Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.
2. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a
different value for each one.
3. If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter
what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.
If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that
the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the
default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when
they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the
transmitter will not be found.
Chapter 6. System Status
209
CCVSR
Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the
CCVSR program.
Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address
and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.
Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must different than
the one used for the Program port (see Ports, page 208).
Mode
Use this section to set the working mode parameters.
Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available
options are: browser, http or https.
Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When
enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the
WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 285). Disabling this
function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still
be connected to.
IPv4 Settings
The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up
(DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.
For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This
is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the
IP address.
Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its
IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address
after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP
address, 192.168.0.61.
2. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network
addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP
installer. See IP Installer, page 378 for information.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
210
The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,
or a fixed address can be specified.
For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS
server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually
radio button and fill in the required information.
Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.
IPv6 Settings
The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-
up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.
For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This
is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the
IP address.
The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,
or a fixed address can be specified.
For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS
server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually
radio button and fill in the required information.
Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.
Private Certificate
When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to
verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the
Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key
and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.
There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a
self-signed certificate and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA)
signed certificate.
Chapter 6. System Status
211
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility –
openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed Private
Certificates, page 380 for details about using OpenSSL to generate your own
private key and SSL certificate.
Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate
For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate
authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate, go
to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate. After
the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your
computer.
Importing the Private Certificate
To import the private certificate, do the following:
1. Click Browse to the right of Private Key, navigate to where your private
encryption key file is located and select it.
2. Click Browse to the right of Certificate, navigate to where your certificate
file is located and select it.
3. Click Upload to complete the procedure.
Note: Both the private encryption key and the signed certificate must be
imported at the same time.
You can click Restore Default to restore any changes made previously.
Certificate Signing Request
The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of
obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.
To perform this operation, do the following:
1. Click Create CSR. The following dialog box appears:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
212
2. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the
example information in the following table:
3. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.
A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now
stored on the transmitter.
4. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient
location on your computer
This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed
SSL certificate.
5. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on
your computer. Click Browse to locate the file; then click Upload to store
it on the transmitter.
Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
State or Province Taiwan
Locality Taipei
Organization Your Company, Ltd.
Unit Techdoc Department
Common Name mycompany.com
This must be the exact domain name of the site that you
want the certificate to be valid for. If the site’s domain name is
www.mycompany.com, and you only specify
mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com
Chapter 6. System Status
213
Note: When you upload the file, the transmitter checks the file to make
sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is
accepted; if not, it is rejected.
If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a
domain name change, for example), simply click Remove CSR.
Copy & Paste
Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them
to another. To copy Transmitter settings to another device, do the following:
1. Select a Physical Transmitter.
2. On the Transmitter menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 201).
3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.
4. Select the Transmitter(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click
Done.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
214
Virtual Transmitter
Creating a Virtual Transmitter allows you to create one connection that sources
media (KVM, audio, USB, serial) from different Transmitters. Virtual
Transmitters appear on the Transmitter settings page with Virtual TX in the
top right corner. Simply select an online Transmitter for each media source.
Dual Display Transmitters can be added as two separate Virtual Transmitters.
To create a Virtual Transmitter, in Transmitter settings click and then
select Create Virtual TX.
Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Virtual Transmitter.
Description Enter a description for the Virtual Transmitter.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Virtual Transmitter
or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 200, for details.
Chapter 6. System Status
215
Video +
Keyboard +
Mouse
Use the drop-down menu to select a KVM (keyboard, video, mouse)
source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Audio Use the drop-down menu to select an audio source for the Virtual
Transmitter.
USB
Peripheral
Use the drop-down menu to select a USBPeripheral source for the
Virtual Transmitter.
Serial Use the drop-down menu to select a serial source for the Virtual
Transmitter.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
216
Intelligent Dual Video Output Management
For the A models (KE6900A, KE6940A), the Intelligent Dual Video Output
Management feature allows the separation of a Dual Display Transmitter’s
(KE6940AT) video outputs (DVI:1 and DVI:2) as two separate Virtual
Transmitters. These separated outputs can be accessed from different
Receivers (KE6900AR or KE6940AR). Receivers can switch between and
connect to both Virtual Transmitters independently with the Access Type
determining which Receiver has control (see page 218).
To use this setup, install the KE devices as shown below and create two Virtual
Transmitters, selecting DVI:1 and DVI:2 as the KVM source for each Virtual
Transmitter.
For non-A model receivers (e.g. KE6910R, KE6912R), you can select between
DVI:1 or DVI:2, but you will always be getting video output from DVI:1.
When connecting to either of the two Virtual Transmitters in the setup shown
above, the mouse cursor may reside on the main or extended dual display
screen, out of view. Therefore even if you have control of the mouse it may not
be visible. To bring the mouse cursor into view on either of the dual display
screens, first enable Boundless Switching (see Boundless Switching, page 229)
and then use the hotkey F8+F9.
Chapter 6. System Status
217
Transmitter Group
Creating a Transmitter Group allows you to create a connection that sources
the video from multiple Transmitters to view at across multiple Receiver
displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver
Group (page 226). Transmitter Groups appear at the bottom of the Transmitter
settings page.
To create a Transmitter Group, in Transmitter settings click and then
select Create Group TX.
Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop
Transmitters to add or remove them in the top panel. The Transmitters in the
top panel will be used as the video source for the Receiver Group at the
Receiver.
Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Transmitter Group.
Description Enter a description for the Transmitter Group.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the
Transmitter Group or leave as All Devices. See Location,
page 200, for details.
From the same PC video
output
Enable to indicate that all of the video outputs in this
Transmitter Group are from the same multi-screen PC.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
218
Note: 1. You can create up to 4 transmitter groups.
2. Any transmitter can only be added to 1 transmitter group with the
From the same PC video output option selected at a time.
Transmitter Permissions
Transmitter Permissions sets the users and groups that can access a
Transmitter, Virtual Transmitter, and Transmitter Group.
Select a device under Transmitter List, and then next to each user or group
click All, View, Occupy, or Exclusive to grant them permission to connect to
the Transmitter with this access type. A green block denotes that the user has
access.
To set Transmitter Permissions, in Transmitter settings, click .
Item Description
Transmitter List Lists Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters and Transmitter
Groups that can be selected to set permissions.
Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select User or Group. After
making a selection, the list of users or groups appears.
Set permissions by selecting the access type (All,
View,Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to each user or
group.
Chapter 6. System Status
219
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by
clicking the boxes under the headings. This defines how
the Transmitter can be accessed by a user or group. The
access type will appear available for the user in the
Receiver's OSD Connections menu. To disable an
access type, uncheck a box in the heading.
All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share,
Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.
View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot
perform operations on it.
Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can
simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input
from the users is placed in a queue and executed
chronologically.
Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has
control. However, additional users may view the
Transmitter’s video. If the user who controls the
Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the
Transmitter’s Timeout box, control is transferred to the
first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.
Access Type Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has
exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users
can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not
apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
220
Receiver
Click Receiver in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Receiver
page allows you to add, delete and configure Receivers (physical receivers),
Receiver Groups, and Video Walls. The KE Matrix Manager automatically
adds Receivers connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.
The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let
you view and configure Receivers.
Active refers to a Receiver connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Receiver connection that is online.
Offline refers to a Receiver connection that is offline.
Use this drop-down menu to filter Receivers by location.
Use Locations to limit the Receivers seen on the page.
Click to add a new Location.
Select a Receiver and click the Move to icon to add devices
to a Location.
Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this
icon to delete it.
Chapter 6. System Status
221
Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.
/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Receivers.
Click an option to have selected Receivers:
Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Receiver and paste them
to another (see Copy & Paste, page 225).
Reboot: Shut down and restart.
Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.
Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login
information to the factory default settings. To reset the login
information, refer to Reset All Information on page 381.
Click to Create Receiver Group or Video Wall (page 226 & 227).
Click to set Receiver permissions (page 230).
Click to search for Receivers.
Click to filter Receivers shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.
SFP Module Detection
When an SFP module is used on the Receiver added, the CCKM can
automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as
exemplified below.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
222
Receiver Configuration
When the KE Matrix Manager discovers Receivers on the network they appear
on the Receiver settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its
settings.
Chapter 6. System Status
223
Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Receiver.
Description: Enter a description for the Receiver.
Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the
device. Locations help organize how you view Receivers on the
settings page.
Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Receivers will be
installed and managed:
Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to
Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD
menu.
Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over
the LAN from the KE Matrix Manager software. This mode is for
advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver
connections configured within the KE Matrix Manager Web GUI.
Enable Media: Select which source type the Receiver can stream:
Video, Audio, USB and RS232.
Audio Output: Use this option to independently stream HDMI,
Analog, or Both audio signals to digital or analog audio output
devices (speakers) connected to the Receiver.*
CCKM IP: Set the IP address and Port number of the computer
running the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number
is 9110.
IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility
for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to
select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility.
See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default
settings are:
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 bit
Flow Control: None
Extender
Properties
If you selected Extender mode (under Basic) set the Transmitter IP
address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source.
If you selected Matrix mode (under Basic) the Properties will be
grayed out. Use Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters, and Transmitter
Groups to configure the connections (see Transmitter, page 200).
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
224
IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.
To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway
select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values
appropriate for your network.
For information to configure the network settings locally on the
device, see Network Configuration, page 133.
Password
Protection
Select Enable to require a password to access the Receiver’s OSD
configuration screen (see page 139).
Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:
Virtual Media: Select this option only if you are plugging a USB
disk drive (including USB HDD/optical disk) into the USB ports.
This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but will not allow
other USB devices to work when plugged into the USB ports. When
Receivers connected to the same transmitter mount or unmount
USB disk drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will
experience a brief delay. Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual
media connections at the same time (keyboard/mouse included).
vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB
peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST/KE8900ST/KE9900ST
do not support the Generic USB Device mode. In this mode,
KE6900/KE6940 Transmitters support up to 2 USB connections;
and allother KE Series Transmitters support up to 5 USB
connections (keyboard/mouse excluded).
Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB disk drives plugged
into the USB ports.
Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with
special functions to plug into the USB ports for console use. Use
this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are
required but do not work when plugged into the console ports.
When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports,
they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD
menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console
ports.
Replace Device Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old
Receiver with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old
Receiver to the new Receiver. Before using this feature, connect
the new Receiver to the network. After clicking Replace Device,
use the drop-down menu to select the new Receiver where the
settings will be applied.
Note:
1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.
2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and
Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a
similar model.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
225
Copy & Paste
Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Receiver and paste them
to another. To copy Receiver settings to another device, do the following:
1. Select a Physical Receiver.
2. On the Receiver menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 221).
3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.
4. Select the Receiver(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click
Done.
Save Click Save to save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
226
Receiver Group
Creating a Receiver Group allows you to connect the video from multiple
transmitters to multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a
Transmitter Group (page 217) to a Receiver Group (see Instant Link,
page 189). Receiver Groups appear at the bottom of the Receiver settings page.
To create a Receiver Group, in Receiver settings, click and then select
Create RX Group.
Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop
Receivers to add or remove them in the top panel. The Receivers in the top
panel will be used to view the video from the Transmitter Group. To connect a
Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group, see Instant Link
, page 189
.
Note: You can create up to 4 receiver groups.
Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Receiver Group.
Description Enter a description for the Receiver Group.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Receiver
Group or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 200, for
details.
Boundless
Switching
Use the radio button to enable or disable Boundless Switching. See
Boundless Switching, page 229 for details.
Group Login When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically
logs into or out of all other receivers within the Receiver Group,
using the same set of credentials.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Chapter 6. System Status
227
Video Wall
Creating a Video Wall allows you to create connections that combine Receiver
displays to form a large video wall. Use the options to group multiple Receivers
in the video wall. A video wall can contain multiple forms of single displays
and grouped displays in various layouts. Video Walls appear listed below
Receivers, on the Receivers settings page.
To create a Video Wall, in Receiver settings, click and then select Create
Video Wall.
Select the number of displays and then group multiple displays to form large
screens and/or use single displays for independent screens to create the video
wall's layout. Click the bar -- under the display icon to select a Receiver for
each display. This configuration should match the actual video wall layout.
Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Video Wall.
Description Enter a description for the Video Wall.
Number of Displays Use the Horizontal and Vertical drop-down menus to select
the number of displays that make up the video wall (a
maximum of 64 are supported). Match this to the physical
layout of the displays. Click the refresh icon to update the
layout.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
228
Bezel Dimension Use the two boxes to increase/decrease the frame size of
each active display.
Lock / Unlock Click the monitor to Lock the (2) bezel settings, so that
when one size is changed they all change.
Click the monitor to Unlock the (2) bezel settings, so that
each size can be set independently.
Layout Selection Click + or X to add or remove additional layouts to the Video
Wall. The options listed here will appear in a drop-down
menu for the Video Wall, allowing you to quickly choose
different layouts from the Receiver settings page. Arrows
below the Layout Selection box allow you to move up or
down in the list.
Three layout templates are available for quick setup. The
Videowall and Splitter options can not be changed but allow
you to select the Receivers. These three layouts can not be
deleted.
Video Wall provides a basic full screen layout where one
Transmitter connects to multiple Receivers to display the
video together as one full screen.
Splitter provides a layout that connects a Transmitter to
multiple Receivers that show the same video displayed
on separate screens independently.
3. Customized provides a basic full screen layout
that can be configured into groups (see Group
below) as desired.*When using the KE6940R in
Customized layouts, only the KE6940’s first video
port will display video because each port’s video
source is independent. When using the KE6940R
in Video Wall or Splitter layouts both video ports
will display video. Video wall only supports Share,
View Only and Occupy access modes.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Video
Wall or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 200, for
details.
Group Login When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver
automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the
Video Wall, using the same set of credentials.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
229
Boundless Switching Enable this feature to allow you to switch KVM control
between different receivers by moving the mouse cursor
across screen boundaries. This option is disabled by
default.
When Boundless Switching is enabled, make sure to
disable the following settings:
On the computer, under Control Panel - Mouse
Properties - Pointer Options, uncheck Enhance pointer
precision.
On the CCKM Main page, click Settings (page 249), then
on the General tab scroll down and disable Fast
Switching.
Note:
Dual Display Transmitters can be set up as two
independent Virtual Transmitters with Boundless
Switching. The placement of the KE6940 setup must
have DVI-1 as the main display on the left and DVI-2 as
a secondary display on the right.Boundless Switching
supports both single and dual video outputs from any
one computer.
For multi-display PCs, make sure of the following:
1. All video outputs are aligned in a row with top
alignment and the main screen on the far left.
2. The transmitter’s port OS has been properly set,
see page 204.
3. Users can optionally group all video outputs from
the same PC into a transmitter group. See p. 217.
If the mouse cursor disappears under a Linux operating
system, execute this command:
gsettings set org.gnome.setting-daemon.plugins.cursor active false
Use the slide bar to zoom in or out for a better view of the
Video Wall layout.
Click this icon to reset the zoom back to full size.
Select multiple display icons and click the Group button to
group the displays into one screen.
Select a group and click Ungroup to ungroup the displays.
Fit Mode Select how the video wall will be displayed:
Height: Fits the video to the height of the display.
Width: Fits the video to the width of the display.
Scale: Fits the video on the entire display.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
230
Receiver Permissions
Receiver Permissions sets which users and groups can access a Receiver.
Select a device under the Receiver List, and then click under Operation to
grant a user or group permission to access the device. This will allow the user
to login to the Receiver’s OSD menu to access the Connections tab.
To set Receiver Permissions, in Receiver settings, click .
Use the RX OSD button to enable/disable showing the
Receiver’s name and IP address in the top left corner of the
connected display. This helps identify which Receiver is
connected to the display.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
Receiver List Lists the Receivers which can be selected to set
permissions.
Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select User or Group. After
making a selection, the list of users or groups appears.
Set permissions by selecting the Operation box next to
each user or group.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
231
Switch
Click Switch in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page you
can edit and delete Network Switches added to the CCKM (for adding switches,
see Adding Network Switches, page 187).
The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let
you view and configure Network Switches.
Active refers to a Network Switch connection that is online.
Offline refers to a Network Switch connection that is offline.
Use this drop-down menu to filter Network Switches by
location. Use Locations to limit the Switches seen on the page.
Click to add a new Location.
Select a Switch and click the Move to icon to add devices
to a Location.
Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this
icon to delete it.
Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.
Click to delete selected Network Switches.
Operation Click the Operation box next to each user or group to
apply access rights on the selected device. This gives
users and groups permission to log in to the Receiver’s
OSD. If a user inherits its permissions from a group, the
box will be Blue. To disable access rights for all users,
uncheck the box in the heading.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
232
Click to search for Network Switches.
Click to filter Network Switches shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.
Network Switch Configuration
When Network Switches are added to the KE Matrix Manager, they appear on
the Switch settings page. Double-click a Network Switch to configure its
settings.
Optionally click Re-sync parameters to automatically update the Network
Switch by enabling IGMP Snooping, IGMP Querier, Fast Leave, Unregistered
Multicast Flooding, Flow Control, and Speed Mode (Auto for Port 1-48 / 10
Gbps FDX for Port 49-52).
Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Network Switch.
Description: Enter a description for the Network Switch.
Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the
device. Locations filter the Network Switches seen on the settings
page.
Chapter 6. System Status
233
Port Configuration
The Port Configuration tab sets the speed mode of each port of the Network
Switch.
Click Save to finish.
SNMP Agent
Settings
SNMP Version: Select the version of the SNMP used.
NMS IP / Host Name: Defines the IP address or the host name of
the Network Switch.
Port: Defines the port value of the Network Switch.
Community / Username: Specifies the SNMP community of the
Network Switch.
Timeout: Defines timeout threshold in which the Network Switch’s
connection is reestablished.
Detect Interval: Defines the interval in which the connection of the
Network Switch is checked for.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
234
Account
Click Users in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Account page
allows you to add, delete and configure users and groups. Instructions for
adding users and groups is provide on page 235.
The Users and Group buttons appear at the top of the page.
Depending on the item selected, either Users or Groups are listed on
the page.
The sort order of the information displayed can be changed by clicking the
column headings.
Three icons in the right corner are used to add users, groups and set
permissions, as explained in the sections that follow.
Chapter 6. System Status
235
Users
The KE Matrix Manager supports three types of accounts, shown in the table
below:
Adding Users
To add a user, do the following:
1. Click on the menu bar.
2. Select Add New User. The Add New User window opens:
User Type Role
Administrator Access, push/pull and management of the KE Matrix
Manager, including configuration and setting up of devices.
Manage Users, Groups, Transmitters, Receivers, Profiles
and Video Walls. Configure personal working environments.
Super User Access and push/pull Receivers, Transmitters and Profiles
they have been given permission for.
User Access Receivers to connect to Transmitters they have been
given permission for.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
236
Enter the required information in the fields provided. A description of each
is given in the table below:
Field Description
Username From 1 to 32 characters are allowed depending on the Account
Policy settings.
Local User Check the Local User box if the account is for logging in to the
KE Matrix Manager software or a Receiver.
Uncheck the Local User box if the account is authenticated with
a 3rd party external source, such as RADIUS, LDAP/AD, or
TACACS+. See ANMS, page 256 for details.
Password From 6 to 32 characters are allowed depending on the Account
Policy settings.
Confirm Password To be sure there is no mistake in the password, you are asked
to enter it again. The two entries must match.
Description Additional information about the user that you may wish to
include.
Type There are three account categories: Administrator, Super User
and User.
The Administrators have full access to make changes within
the KE Matrix Manager software, which includes adding and
removing Transmitters, Receivers, accounts, preferences,
and configuration settings.
The Super Users have access to the Receiver’s OSD menu
and can connect Channels and Profiles.
The Users can log in to Receivers to connect channels.
Status Status allows you to control the user’s account and access, as
follows:
Active provides the user with access and permissions as
granted.
Disable lets you suspend a user’s account without actually
deleting it, so that it can be easily reinstated in the future.
OSD Language Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to
use during OSD sessions for this user. Options are: Chinese
(Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean,
Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
Toolbar Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to call the Tool Bar function for
this user. The Tool Bar is used when accessing the computer
from the Transmitter or Receiver side.
Logout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this
function, the user is automatically logged out. A login is
necessary before the KE Matrix Manager can be accessed
again. The default is 30 minutes.
Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the device waits when a session is idle
before turning off the display.
Chapter 6. System Status
237
3. When your selections have been made click Apply.
4. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.
5. The new user appears on the main panel.
The columns show the Username; User Level, Status, OSD Language,
Description; and Group.
Modifying Users
To modify a user, do the following:
1. In the main panel, double-click the user’s name.
2. In the Edit User page that comes up, make your changes, then click Apply.
Deleting Users
To delete a user, do the following:
1. In the main panel, check the box next to the user’s name.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.
OSD Title Bar
Duration
When the accessing a port, the top left-hand corner will show a
title bar displaying the access mode and the device name.
Select how long you wish the title bar is to be displayed for, or
check Disable to not show any title bar.
Welcome Message If you want the Welcome Message to appear on screen when
the user logs into the KE Matrix Manager, select Enable.
If you want the user's Screen Name to appear with the
Welcome Message, check the Username check box.
Group Click Select and check a box to add the user to a group.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Field Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
238
Groups
Groups allow administrators to easily and efficiently manage users and
devices. Since device access rights apply to anyone who is a member of the
group, administrators need only set them once for the group, instead of having
to set them for each user individually. Multiple groups can be defined to allow
some users access to specific devices, while restricting other users from
accessing them. Device permissions are discussed on page 240.
Adding Groups
To create a group, do the following:
1. Click Group on the Account page.
2. Click and then select Add New Group. The Add New Group
window opens:
3. Enter the required information in the appropriate fields. A description of
each of the fields is given in the table below:
4. At this point you can assign users to the group by clicking Edit.
5. When your selections have been made click Apply.
Field Description
Group Name A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.
Description Additional information about the user that you may
wish to include. A maximum of 32 characters is
allowed.
Member Lists the users that are currently in the group. To add
users, click the Edit button.
Chapter 6. System Status
239
6. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.
7. The new group appears in the main panel.
The columns show the Group Name, Description and Members that are
in the group.
Repeat the above procedure to add additional groups.
Modifying Groups
To modify a group, do the following:
1. In the main panel, double-click the group’s name.
2. Make your changes, then click Apply.
Deleting Groups
To delete a group, do the following:
1. In the main panel, check the box next to the group’s name.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
240
Permissions
You can assign Transmitter, Receiver and Profile permissions for users and
groups from the Account page.
Assigning Device Permissions
To assign permissions for a user or group from the Account page, do the
following:
1. Click on the menu bar. The Set User Permissions window opens:
2. To set the permissions, select a user or group, then a device and select the
Access Type under each column so that it turns green. Make your
permission settings for each user or group on each device according to the
information provided below:
Item Description
User List Use the radio button to view the Users or Group list.
Click a user or group to configure their permissions.
Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select Transmitter, Receiver
or Profile. After making a selection, a list of devices or
profiles appears. Set permissions by selecting the access
type (All, View, Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to the
device.
Chapter 6. System Status
241
3. When you have finished making your choices, click Apply.
4. In the confirmation popup that appears, click OK.
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by
clicking under the heading(s) next to each device. This
defines how the device can be accessed by the user or
group. When granted, the access types (All, View,
Occupy, Exclusive) for Transmitters will appear available
for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connection page (see
page 159).
All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share,
Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.
View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot
perform operations on it.
Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can
simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input
from the users is placed in a queue and executed
chronologically.
Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has
control. However, additional users may view the
Transmitter’s video. If the user who controls the
Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the
Transmitter’s Timeout box, control is transferred to the
first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.
Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has
exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users
can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not
apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.
Operation (Receiver and Profile): The Operation access
type for Receivers allows users to log into Receivers,
and for Profiles allows a user to connect the Profile from
a Receiver.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
242
Profile
Click Profile in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Profile page
allows you to create, run and schedule connection profiles. Profiles channel
specific Receiver to Transmitter connections and can be instantly connected
from the Profile page at anytime. Profiles can be also scheduled to run
automatically at specific times.
The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let
you view and configure Profiles.
Click to connect the selected Profile.
Click to disconnect the selected Profile.
Click to delete the selected Profile.
Click to Create Profile or Create Schedule (page 243 & 246).
Click and enter text to search for a Profile.
Check the box next to a Profile and click the Connect or Disconnect
icon to start/stop profile connections. Check the box next to a Schedule
and click the Enable or Disable icon to enable/disable a schedule.
Appears on the Schedule page, click to enable the selected schedule.
Appears on the Schedule page, click to disable the selected
schedule.
Chapter 6. System Status
243
Adding a Profile
Creating a Profile allows you to quickly connect single or multiple Receiver to
Transmitter connections.
To add a Profile, do the following:
1. On the Profile page click and then select Create Profile. The Create
Profile window appears:
Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Profile.
Description Enter a description for the Profile.
Permissions Click Select and check the box of the users / groups you
want to allow to connect this Profile. When the user logs
into a Receiver, the profile will appear listed in the OSD
menu on the Profile page (see page 164), allowing them
to connect it.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
244
2. After filling in the information, click a Receiver, select Select TX and use
the drop-down menu select a Transmitter; or use Transmitter List at the
bottom of the page to drag-and-drop Transmitters to Receivers to create
the connection.
Access Mode This defines how the Transmitter in a Profile can be
accessed by Receivers when multiple users attempt to
access it.
View Only: Receivers only have view access to the
Transmitter’s video display.
Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can
simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input
from the users is placed in a queue and executed
chronologically.
Occupy: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose
Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no
activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the
amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and
the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard
or mouse input after the port has been released gets to
occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.
Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Transmitter
has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other
users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function
does not apply to Transmitters which have this setting.
Login Check Check this box to require a user to be logged in to the
Receiver before a Profile can connect it to a Transmitter.
When enabled, a user must be logged into the Receiver
or it will not connect to the Transmitter when the Profile is
initiated.
Lock OSD Checking this box will lock the Receiver’s OSD screen
when the Profile connects it to a Transmitter.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location to filter the
Receivers displayed on the page.
Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to exit without saving.
Item Description
Chapter 6. System Status
245
3. After configuring the connections, click Save. The new Profile appears on
the Profile page.
4. To connect Profiles, check the box of the Profile(s) you want to connect,
and click .
5. To disconnect Profiles, click .
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
246
Adding a Schedule
Creating a Schedule allows you to connect Profiles at specific dates, times and
intervals.
To add a Schedule, do the following:
1. On the Profile page click .
2. Click and then select Create Schedule. The Create Schedule
window appears:
3. After the schedule is configured, click Save.
Item Description
Profile Use the drop-down menu to select a Profile to schedule.
Frequency Use the drop-down menu to select how often the Profile should run:
Once, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.
When you select Weekly/Monthly an additional drop-down menu
appears to select the Week Day/Month Day on which the profile will run.
Start Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to begin running.
End Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to stop running.
Start Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to connect.
End Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to disconnect.
Every If you select Daily, Monthly or Weekly, the Every option appears allowing
you to enter how often you want the schedule to run. For example, enter
3 months if you want the profile to run once every three months. If you
want to run the schedule once a day, once a week or once a month, use
the default entry of 1.
Chapter 6. System Status
247
Log
Click Log in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Log page lists
events that take place and provides a breakdown of the time, user, severity,
device, and log information. You can change the sort order of the display by
clicking on the column headings.
Click the drop-down menu beside a heading to filter events into
subcategories. Selecting a subcategory allows you to view only the logs
that relate to the choice. The meanings of the headings at the top of the
page are straightforward:
All Severity refers to the event’s severity type: Information, Error, or
Warning
All Device refers to the Transmitter or Receiver that relates to the
event. If no device is listed the event refers to the KE Matrix Manager
software.
All User refers to the username that the event relates to. If no username
appears, the event is general system information.
Time refers to the date and time that the event occurred.
Log Information provides detailed information about each event.
Click to delete the logs currently displayed in the list.
Click and enter text to search for an event log.
Click to save the log contents to a file on your computer.
Click to open a pop-up window that allows you to set how many days or
the number of records to record before over-writing old log files. Use the radio
button to select By Period (Days) or By Records and enter the number to use
before overwriting the oldest log files.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
248
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
249
Chapter 7
System Settings
Overview
The System Settings are accessed by clicking
from the System Status
page (see System Status, page 197). There are 7 tabs to configure the KE
Manager system settings: General, ANMS, FW Upgrade, Redundancy,
Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions.
General
Clicking from the system status page opens the General tab, as shown
below:
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
250
Heading Item Description
Basic KE Manager Version This provides the version of the KE Manager
software.
Serial Number This provides the serial number and a link to
upgrade the software.
KE Manager Name Enter a name for the KE Manager.
Description Enter a description for the KE Manager.
Language Select the language for the KE Manager. Choices
are: English, Chinese (Traditional), Simplified
Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian,
French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
Beeper Select Enable to sound a beep from the
Transmitter/Receiver every time a configuration
change is made.
CCKM Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time
entered in the box, a user logged into the CCKM
is automatically logged out. Check Disable to turn
this function off.
Authentication Lock When a temporary disconnection happens, this
function allows the user to retain his/her settings
upon resuming connection within the time
threshold set. The user keeps the same
authentication and display.
Uncheck Disable to turn this function on.
Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to keep
the authentication and display for.
When disabled or if enabled but after the time
threshold set, the user is prompted to be
authenticated upon resuming the connection.
Boundless Switching
Focus
When using Boundless Switching(see Boundless
Switching, page 229) across multiple receivers
within a receiver group or video wall, a colored
border is shown on the receiver display currently
being accessed (focus receiver).
Uncheck Always to only display the colored
border for a set time interval immediately after
switching the focus receiver.
Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to display
the colored border for upon switching the focus
receiver.
Push / Pull Login
Check
Enable to check the access rights of the users
receiving transmitter sessions upon push / pull.
Chapter 7. System Settings
251
Network
Ports
HTTP Port Sets the HTTP service port used to access the KE
Manager. This is the port number to use for a
browser login. The default is 8080.
Device Port Sets the Device service port used to access the
KE Manager. Configure this port number on the
Transmitter and Receiver to access to the KE
Manager software (see Manager Address,
page 143 and 150). The default is 9110.
HTTPS Port Sets the HTTPS service port used to access the
KE Manager. This is the port number to use for a
secure browser login. The default is 8443.
Example: To access the KE Manager with an IP
address of 192.168.0.100 using a secure browser
login, enter: https://192.168.0.100:8443
Fast Switching Select the default resolution to use so that you
can switch faster when changing Receiver to
Transmitter connections. If the monitor you are
using does not support fast switching the video
may not display correctly when this setting is
enabled.
Note: Make sure to disable Boundless Switching
when Fast Switching is enabled.
Account
Policy
Enforce Password
History
This setting determines the number of unique new
passwords that must be used before an old
password can be reused. Uncheck the box and
enter a number to enforce the password history
policy.
Enhance Password
Rule
Select Enable to enforce rules for creating
passwords, as follows:
The password length must be at least 8 charac-
ters.
The password must contain both upper and
lowercase characters.
The password must contain a number (0
through 9).
If a user types in the wrong password 5 times
consecutively, their account will be locked out
for 10 minutes.
CLI Mode CLI Mode Login Use the radio button to Enable or Disable
command line interface logins to the KE Manager.
Warning: If Disable CLI Mode Login is selected,
anybody can login via Telnet with administrator
privileges without needing to authenticate,
allowing control of the entire installation. For
installations requiring a high level of security, it’s
recommended that Enable CLI Mode Login be
applied.
Heading Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
252
Connection Redundancy
You can setup priority connection for receivers. Where a transmitter fails, this
function allows the receiver to connect to the transmitter of the highest priority
that is available.
Follow the steps below to setup the priority list.
1. Click Enable to enable this function.
2. Click Edit. A window will pop-up to allow editing.
Receiver
Login
Settings
Anonymous Login Use this to anonymously login a user at select
Receivers. This option allows users to access the
Receiver and connect to Transmitters without
needing to login.
Click Device List to display the list and check the
box next to the Receiver(s) to enable the
Anonymous Login feature.
Anonymous Login
User
When Anonymous Login (above) is enabled for
Receivers, select a user from the drop-down
menu to use as the default account to
anonymously login to the Receiver.
EDID Mode EDID Mode Use this drop-down menu to set the default EDID
mode for all Transmitters. To set a different EDID
mode for each Transmitter, use the drop-down
menu to select Customized and then click Edit. A
Transmitter list will appear with drop-down menus
to configure each device’s EDID mode.
Connection Redundancy Use this drop-down menu to set connection
redundancy function. You can setup priority
connection with this function.
Please refer to Connection Redundancy on
page 252.
Pop-up Alert Enable and click Edit to select the types of events
to automatically trigger and display a pop-up
message.
JavaClient / WinClient For AiT models only, click and drag to rearrange
the login priorities of the different access modes,
among Share, Occupy, View Only, and Exclusive.
See Login Access Priority (AiT Models only),
page 255 for details.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to cancel the changes.
Heading Item Description
Chapter 7. System Settings
253
3. For Alarm Sound, click Enable.
4. To create a new list, click New. A Priority List 1 will be shown. (Click
New again to create another list.)
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
254
5. Select the transmitters you wish to be in the list from the “Available TX”
list and click Add. The added transmitter will be shifted to the “Selected
TX” list.
To deselect the transmitter, click to select the transmitter from the
“Selected TX” list and click Remove. The transmitter will be shifted back
to the “Available TX” list.
6. Select a target receiver by first clicking the drop-down menu “Target RX”,
and select a receiver.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to add more priority lists.
8. Click Save to save the settings.
Chapter 7. System Settings
255
Login Access Priority (AiT Models only)
If your system includes an AiT device, “JavaClient/WinClient” (for remote
viewer) will appear at the bottom of the General tab to let you select the login
access priority depending on the user.
Share: User has full control and can simultaneously share control of the remote
viewer. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.
Occupy: The first user to access the remote viewer has control. However,
additional users may view the remote viewer. If the user controlling the remote
viewer is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter’s Timeout box,
control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.
View only: User can only view the remote viewer but cannot perform
operations on it.
Exclusive: The first user to access the remote viewer has exclusive control. No
other users can view the remote viewer. The Timeout function does not apply
when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
256
ANMS
The ANMS (Advanced Network Management Settings) tab is used to set up
login authentication and authorization management from external sources, and
SNMP configurations. It is
organized into three pages, as described below.
Event Destination
SMTP Settings
To have the KE Manager email reports from the SMTP server to you, do
the following:
1. Enable the Enable report from the following SMTP Server, select the
Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error), and key in the SMTP
Server IP address and SMTP Port.
Note: The SMTP server used can either be TLS-encrypted or
unencrypted. CCKM shall send TLS-encrypted or unencrypted
Chapter 7. System Settings
257
email reports depending on the type of the SMTP server
connected.
2. If your server requires authentication, check the Server requires
authentication checkbox, and key in the appropriate information for the
Account Name and Password fields.
3. Key in the email address of where the report is being sent from in the
From field.
Note: 1. Only one email address is allowed in the From field, and it
cannot exceed 64 Bytes.
2. 1 Byte = 1 English alphanumeric character.
4. Key in the email address (addresses) of where you want the SMTP
reports sent to in the To field.
Note: If you are sending the report to more than one email address,
separate the addresses with a semicolon. The total cannot exceed
256 Bytes.
5. Click Save.
1. Once set, an SMTP report will be sent to the recipients for every
100 logs accumulated or once every 30 minutes.
2. An immediate SMTP report will also be sent whenever an error
log occurs.
Syslog Settings
To record all the events that take place on the KE Manager and write them
to a Syslog server, do the following:
1. Check Enable.
2. Use the drop-down menu to select the Log Level (Information,
Warning, or Error).
3. Key in the Server IP address of the Syslog server.
4. Key in the Service Port number. The valid port range is 1-65535.
5. Click Save.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
258
Authentication & Authorization
RADIUS Settings
To allow authentication and authorization through a RADIUS server, do
the following:
1. Check Enable.
2. Fill in the IP addresses and service port of the Preferred RADIUS
Server and Alternate RADIUS Server.
3. In the Timeout field, set the time in seconds that the KE Manager waits
for a RADIUS server reply before it times out.
4. In the Retries field, set the number of allowed retries.
5. In the Shared Secret field, key in the character string that you want to
use for authentication between the KE Manager and the RADIUS
Server. A minimum of 6 characters is required.
6. On the RADIUS server, Users can be authenticated with any of the
following methods:
Use the same Username on both the RADIUS server and the KE
Manager.
Use the same Group name on both the RADIUS server and the
KE Manager.
Use the same Username/Group name on both the RADIUS server
and the KE Manager.
In each case, the user’s access rights are the ones assigned that were
assigned when the User or Group was created on the KE Manager.
LDAP / AD Settings:
Chapter 7. System Settings
259
To allow authentication and authorization for the KE Manager via LDAP /
AD, refer to the information in the table, below:
On the LDAP / AD server, Users can be authenticated with any of the
following methods:
With MS Active Directory schema.
Item Action
Enable Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow LDAP / AD
authentication and authorization.
Enable SSL Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow SSL connections.
LDAP Server IP
and Port
Fill in the IP address and port number for the LDAP / AD server.
You can use the IPv4 address, the IPv6 address or the domain
name in the LDAP Server field.
For LDAP, the default port number is 389.
Timeout Set the time in seconds that the KE Manager waits for an LDAP /
AD server reply before it times out.
Admin DN Consult the LDAP / AD administrator to ascertain the appropriate
entry for this field. For example, the entry might look like this:
ou=kn4132,dc=aten,dc=com
Admin Name Key in the LDAP administrator’s username.
Password Key in the LDAP administrator’s password.
Search DN Set the distinguished name of the search base. This is the
domain name where the search starts for user names.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
260
Note: If this method is used, the LDAP schema for MS Active Directory
must be extended. Without schema – Only the Usernames used on
the KE Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP / AD server.
User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KE
Manager.
Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KE Manager are
matched to the names on the LDAP server. User privileges are the
same as the ones configured in the KE Manager software.
Without schema – Only Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are
the ones configured for the groups he belongs to in the KE Manager.
Without schema – Usernames and Groups in AD are matched. User
privileges are the ones configured for the User and the Groups in the
KE Manager.
TACACS+ Settings:
Enable TACACS+ and enter the following information:
Preferred TACACS+ Server
Preferred TACACS+ Service Port
Shared Secret 1
Alternate TACACS+ Server
Alternate TACACS+ Service Port
Shared Secret 2
Chapter 7. System Settings
261
SNMP
SNMP Trap & SNMP Agent
To be notified of SNMP trap events, do the following:
1. Check Enable SNMP Trap.
2. Enter the Server IP and the Port of the PC / server to be notified of
SNMP trap events.
3. Next to Notification, click Select and check the types of events for
sending SNMP notifications.
4. Check Enable SNMP Agent.
5. Check / uncheck the SNMP Agents for sending SNMP trap events.
To add additional SNMP Agents, you must first Disable SNMP
Agent.
6. Click Save.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
262
FW Upgrade
In FW Upgrade all KE devices that are online are listed, allowing you to select
which devices get upgraded. New firmware versions can be downloaded from
our website as they become available. Check the website regularly to find the
latest upgrade packages.
To upgrade the firmware do the following:
1. Go to our website and download the firmware upgrade package
appropriate to your KE device.
2. Open your browser and log in to the KE Manager with an administrator’s
account.
3. Click the Settings icon; select the FW Upgrade tab, the FW Upgrade
page appears:
All the devices that are capable of being upgraded are listed.
Note: Only online devices show up in the list. Offline devices do not get
upgraded.
4. Check the checkbox in front of the devices you want to upgrade. Uncheck
the devices that you do not want to upgrade.
5. Click Browse. Navigate to the directory where the firmware upgrade file
is located and select it.
6. Enable or disable Check FW Version
If you enabled Check FW Version the current firmware level is
compared with that of the upgrade file. If the current version is equal to
Chapter 7. System Settings
263
or higher than the upgrade version, a popup message appears, to inform
you of the situation and stops the upgrade procedure.
If you didn't enable Check FW Version, the upgrade file is installed
without checking what its level is.
If you cancel the firmware upgrade, you have to wait 12 seconds
before you can disable Check FW Version and restart the firmware
upgrade.
7. Click Upgrade to start the upgrade procedure. As the upgrade proceeds,
progress information is shown on the screen. Once the upgrade completes
successfully, the devices will reset.
8. Log in to each device and check the firmware version to be sure it is the
new one.
Firmware Upgrade Recovery
If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is
abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may
become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed
or interrupted upgrade, do the following
1. Power off the KE device.
2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.
3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.
4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the
failure.
5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
264
Redundancy
The Redundancy tab allows you to set up a backup computer in case the
computer hosting the KE Manager goes offline. If the KE Manager goes
offline, the secondary computer will automatically take over operations,
allowing all connections to continue without disruption – with only a brief
period of 30 seconds when new connections can't be started. When the primary
computer comes back online it retrieves the updated database from the
secondary computer and re-takes all KE Manager operations.
A CCKM supports up to 5 secondary servers.
To set up Redundancy, do the following:
1. Install KE Manager on a secondary computer with a USB license key. For
detailed instructions, see page 171.
Note: A second USB license key is required if you have more than 8 KE
Series devices in your setup.
2. On the secondary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click and go to
the Redundancy tab.
3. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Secondary radio button.
4. Use the Primary Server IP drop-down menu to select the primary IP
address.
5. Click Save.
6. Redundancy is now running on the secondary computer.
Chapter 7. System Settings
265
7. On the primary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click and go to
the Redundancy tab.
8. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Primary radio button.
9. Use the Secondary Server IP drop-down menu to select the secondary IP
address.
10. Enter the Username and Password of the secondary computer’s local
administrator account.
11. Click Save.
12. Information about the Redundancy status can be found in the event log
(see Log, page 247 for details).
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
266
Backup / Restore
The Backup/Restore tab is divided into three panels: Backup, Restore, and
Export Device List:
The operations to perform backup/restore procedures are described in the table
below and in the section that follows:
Procedure Operation
Backup Backs up theKE Manager configuration – including profile and
schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs,
and system settings.
Restore Deletes the current profile and schedule configurations, user and
group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings; then
restores those settings to the values that exist in the previously saved
backup file.
Export Device
List
Clicking Export allows you to save a file with a complete list of the
devices added to the KE Manager. The file contains the ID, name,
description and IP dddress of each transmitter and receiver. An
Existing column also lists if the device is available: Yes, it exists and is
available, or No, it is offline or has been removed.
Chapter 7. System Settings
267
Backup
To back up system configuration settings, do the following:
1. (Optional) In the Backup panel, check Add Password, and provide a
password for the backup file.
Note: Providing a password is a security feature – if you provide a
password, you will need to give the same password in order to
restore the configuration settings from this file.
2. Click Backup.
3. In the dialog box that comes up, Click Save to save the configuration file
(System.conf) to a location on your hard disk.
4. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file and click Save.
Restore
To restore system configuration settings, do the following:
1. In the Restore panel, click Browse.
2. Navigate to the directory where the backup file is located and select it.
3. When you return to the Backup/Restore page enter the password you set
when the backup file was created.
Note: If you did not set a password for the file, leave the field blank.
4. Click Restore.
5. Click OK to confirm that you want to restore the configuration data.
When the Restore procedure is in process, a message stating that the KE
Manager will restart will appear. After a short while the KE Manager
closes and refreshes at the log in screen. When it comes back up the
configuration settings that were restored from the backup file are in effect.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
268
Certificates
This tab provides information about Private Certificates:
Private Certificate
When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to
verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the
Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key
and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.
There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a
self-signed certificate; and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA)
signed certificate.
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility –
openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed
Private Certificates, page 380 for details about using OpenSSL to generate
your own private key and SSL certificate.
Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate
For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate
authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate,
Chapter 7. System Settings
269
go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate.
After the CA sends you the certificate and private encryption key, save
them to a convenient location on your computer.
Importing the Private Certificate
To import the private certificate, do the following:
1. Click Import from the bottom of the Private Certificate page, shown here:
2. Click Browse to the right of Certificate Filename; and browse to where
your certificate file is located; and select it.
3. Click Import to complete the procedure.
Note: Clicking Restore Defaults returns the device to using the default ATEN
certificate.
Certificate Signing Request
The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of
obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.
To perform this operation do the following:
1. Click New. The following dialog box appears:
2. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the
example information in the following table:
Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
State or Province Taiwan
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
270
3. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.
A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now
stored on the KE Manager software.
4. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient
location on your computer.
This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed
SSL certificate.
5. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on
your computer. Click Import to locate the file; then click Import to store
it on the KE Manager.
Note: When you upload the file, the KE Manager checks the file to make sure
the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if
not, it is rejected.
If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a
domain name change, for example), simply click Restore Defaults.
Locality Taipei
Organization Your Company, Ltd.
Organization Unit Tech Department
Common Name mycompany.com
Note: This must be the exact domain name of the site
that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site’s
domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only
specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com
Information Example
Chapter 7. System Settings
271
Sessions
The Sessions tab shows all of the users that are logged into KE Manager and
OSD sessions and provides information concerning the “who, where and
when” of each session. This page also gives the administrator the option of
forcing a user logout by selecting the user and clicking Kill Session next to
each user.
Username refers to the user that logged in to establish a session.
User Type refers to the account type of the user.
Service refers to how the user logged into their session – via KE Manager,
Command Line, or OSD.
IP refers to the IP address from which the user has logged in.
Login Time refers to the date/time that the user logged into the session.
Last Access refers to the last time the user session was active.
Operation provides the Kill Session button to force a user logout.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
272
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
273
Chapter 8
Connections
Overview
The Connections panel is found on the KE Matrix Manager main page, just
below System Status. Connections provides a diagram of current Transmitter
to Receiver connections. Before connections are established the panel appears
blank, as shown below. To connect Receivers to Transmitters, use the Instant
Link panel (page 189), or create a connection Profile (page 242).
When connections are made, clicking a device in the left column provides a
way to view the connection, hovering the mouse cursor over the connection
diagram in the right column allows you to disconnect the device, as explained
in the sections that follows.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
274
Connections
When Receivers connect to Transmitters, they appears in the Connections
panel. There are two columns – each lists either Transmitters or Receivers. The
columns can be swapped by clicking the TX-RX or RX-TX button. Devices in
the left column can be clicked to display their connection to devices, shown in
the right column. Connections, shown in the right column, can be disconnected
by clicking the
X
over the connection diagram.
Item Description
On the heading bar under Connections, click this icon to
change the sort order of the Transmitters or Receivers
listed in the left column.
Left Column Click a device in the left column to view its connection in
the right column. A diagram to its connected device(s)
appears in the right column.
Right Column The right column displays a connection diagram when a
device in the left column is selected. Move the mouse
cursor over the diagram and click
X
to disconnect the
devices. This column also shows the user and access
type (Exclusive, Occupy, Share, View Only) used to
establish the connection.
Transmitter Lists Transmitters that are online and connected to
Receivers.
Receiver Lists Receivers that are online and connected to
Transmitters.
Click to view Transmitter to Receiver connections. This
will list Transmitters in the left column so that they can be
selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the
right column.
Click to view Receiver to Transmitter connections. This
will list Receivers in the left column so that they can be
selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the
right column.
Chapter 8. Connections
275
Based on the different access types, users attempting to connect to device ports
that are already being accessed by another user may or may not be able to
connect. See the table below for scenarios where users are granted (O) or
denied access (X).
Click this icon to Refresh the Transmitters and Receivers
list in Connections panel.
Undo Click this icon to undo the most recent disconnection.
New Connect
Attempt
Currently
Connected
Exclusive Share Occupy View Only
E
XCLUSIVE
XXXX
Share X O X O
Occupy X X O O
View Only X O O O
NoneOOOO
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
276
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
277
Chapter 9
Scheduled Profile
Overview
The Scheduled Profile panel is found on the KE Matrix Manager main page,
just below Connections. Scheduled Profiles displays connection profiles that
have been scheduled. Click Go to Schedule to edit and create profile schedules
(page 242). To create Profiles, see page 243.
Item Description
Headings The headings provide the schedules: Name, Description,
Start, End, and Status. Start and End show the time/date
the profile is scheduled to begin and end. Status displays
the number of days until to the next scheduled run.
Go to Schedule Clicking Go to Schedule opens the Profile settings page
which allows you to create and edit connection profiles.
See Profile, page 242 for details.
Click this icon to Refresh the connections list in the right
column.
Undo Click this icon to undo the most recent disconnection.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
278
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
279
Chapter 10
Sessions
Overview
The Sessions panel is found at the bottom of the KE Matrix Manager main
page, just below Scheduled Profile. Sessions displays information about users
logged into devices and the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. Click Go to
Sessions to view the settings page (see page 271).
Item Description
Headings The headings provide information about each user
session: Username, User Level, Service, IP, Login Time,
and Last Access. For more details about each heading,
see Sessions, page 271.
Go to Sessions Clicking Go to Sessions opens the Sessions settings
page which provides a page displaying the same
information found in this panel.
Click this icon to Refresh the Sessions list.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
280
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
281
Chapter 11
Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
Introduction
If the video source(s) of your AiT model is connected, the remote viewer can
be used to access these video source(s) as if it were your local system.
A window will be presented and the remote server is displayed inside this
window.
You can maximize the window, drag the borders to resize the window and
use the scrollbars to move around the screen.
Due to net lag, there might be a slight delay before your keystrokes show
up. You may also have to wait a bit for the remote mouse to catch up to
your local mouse before you click.
Due to net lag, or insufficient computing power on the local machine,
some images, especially motion images, may display poorly.
There are several ways you can access the remote servers and are listed below:
1. Windows viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
2. Java viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
3. Windows Client Viewer AP (without browser). On the browser login
page, a “Download Windows Client AP” is available. Refer to The
Windows/Java Client AP on page 284 for more information.
4. Java Client Viewer AP (without browser). Since the control is identical
to the windows client viewer, refer to The Control Panel on page 287 on
the control of the viewer interface.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
282
Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access)
The Windows and Java Client Viewer is accessible via a web browser.
At the login screen of the Remote Viewer page, enter the username/password
and click Login. You can change the login language by using the language
drop-down menu.
A second or two after, the video source(s)’ display appears as a window on
your desktop:
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
283
The control/access is laid out in the control panel. Refer to The Control Panel
on page 287 for access/control information.
By default, if you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Windows Client
viewer is used. If you use other browsers, the Java Client viewer is used.
If you manually set the preference to Java Client when you use Internet
Explorer as your browser, the Java Client viewer is also used.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
284
The Windows/Java Client AP
Download
To download the stand-alone Windows or Java Client program, go to the
browser login page and click the Download Windows Client AP or
Download Java Client AP button.
Note: Make sure your system has JRE 6 Update 3 or later installed. Java is
available for free download from Sun’s Java web site (http://
java.sun.com).
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
285
Starting Up
For the first time running the AP, right-click the Windows/Java Client AP and
click “Run as administrator” to start.
The Client Connection Screen is shown below and each components are
described in the table. Windows Client will be the example shown here.
1. Double-click the unit. When the unit
is
connected, a login window appears:
Item Description
Server List When you run the Client program, it automatically searches
the user’s local LAN segment for AiT units, and lists
whichever ones it finds in this box. If you want to connect to
one of these units, double-click to connect.
Server If the AiT unit you wish to connect to is at a remote location, it
will not be found on your LAN. You can enter its IP address
and port yourself.
If you don’t know the Port number, contact the Administrator.
When the IP address and Port number for the unit you wish to
connect to have been specified, click Connect to start the
connection.
Connect Starts connecting to the AiT unit.
Disconnect These buttons become active once you log into the AiT unit.
Switch to remote view
Message panel The blank field on the right of the Server section shows the
current status of the server connection.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
286
2. Provide a valid Username and Password and click OK to continue.
Note: The default Username is administrator and the default Password is
password.
After you have successfully logged in, the connection screen reappears:
At this time there are two active buttons and are described in the table
below:
3. Click Switch to remote view to access the video source(s)’ display(s).
Refer to The Control Panel on page 287 for information about the remote
access interface.
Button Action
Disconnect Breaks the connection to the unit.
Switch to remote
view
Opens a window on the user’s desktop containing the remote
server’s display that is the same as the one that appears with the
browser-based Windows client.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
287
The Control Panel
The control panel is hidden at the upper or lower center of the screen (the
default is up). It becomes visible when you move the mouse pointer over it:
Note: 1. The above image shows the complete Control Panel. The icons that
appear can be customized. See Control Panel Configuration,
page 302, for details.
2. To move the Control Panel to a different location, click and drag the
Control Panel.
The panel is consisted of two rows.
The second row shows the video resolution of the remote display, the bus
the user is on, and an information button where you can click it for a
menu-style version of the control panel toolbar (see below).
Right clicking the second row area also brings up the menu-style control
panel. This menu allows you to select options for the Screen Mode, Zoom,
Mouse Pointer type, and Mouse Sync Mode. These functions are discussed
in the sections that follow.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
288
Control Panel Functions
The Control Panel functions are described in the table below.
Icon Function
This is a toggle. Click to ping the Control Panel to the window where
it is always displayed on top of other screen elements. Click again to
have it display normally.
Click to bring up the Video Options dialog box. (See Video Settings,
page 292, for details).
Toggles the display between Full Screen Mode and Windowed
Mode.
Click to take a snapshot (screen capture) of the remote display. To
configure the Snapshot parameters, refer to Snapshot on page 303.
Click to toggle the remote display between color and grayscale.
Click to zoom the remote display window.
Note: This feature is only available in windowed mode (Full Screen
Mode is off). See Zoom, page 298 for details.
Click to send a Ctrl+Alt+Del signal to the remote system.
Click to bring up the on-screen keyboard (see The On-Screen
Keyboard, page 299).
Click to select the mouse pointer type.
Note: This icon changes depending on which mouse pointer type is
selected (see Mouse Pointer Type, page 300).
Click to toggle Automatic or Manual mouse sync.
When the selection is Automatic, a green mark appears on the
icon.
When the selection is Manual, a red mark appears on the icon.
See Mouse DynaSync Mode, page 300 for a complete explanation
of this feature.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
289
These icons show the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock status
of the remote computer.
When the lock state is On, the LED is bright orange.
When the lock state is Off, the LED is dull blue.
Click on the icon to toggle the status.
Note: These icons and your local keyboard icons are in sync.
Clicking an icon causes the corresponding LED on your keyboard to
change accordingly. Likewise, pressing a Lock key on your
keyboard causes the icon’s color to change accordingly.
Click to bring up the Macro dialog box (see Macros, page 290 for
more details).
Click to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box. The icon changes
when a virtual media device is mounted on the port. See Virtual
Media, page 295, for specific details.
Note: This icon displays in gray when the function is disabled or not
available to the user.
Click to bring up the Control Panel Configuration dialog box.
See Control Panel Configuration, page 302, for details on
configuring the Control Panel.
Icon Function
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
290
Macros
The Macros icon provides access to three functions found in the Macros
dialog box: Hotkeys, User Macros, and System Macros. Each of these
functions is described in the following sections.
Hotkeys
Various actions, corresponding to clicking the Control Panel icons, can be
accomplished directly from the keyboard with hotkeys. Selecting the Hotkeys
radio button lets you configure which hotkeys perform the actions. The actions
are listed to the left; their hotkeys are shown to the right. Use the checkbox to
the left of an action’s name to enable or disable its hotkey.
If you find the default Hotkey combinations inconvenient, you can reconfigure
them as follows:
1. Highlight an Action, then click Set Hotkey.
2. Press your selected Function keys (one at a time). The key names appear in
the Hotkeys field as you press them.
You can use the same function keys for more than one action, as long
as the key sequence is not the same.
To cancel setting a hotkey value, click Cancel; to clear an action’s
Hotkeys field, click Clear.
3. When you have finished keying in your sequence, click Save.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
291
To reset all the hotkeys to their default values, click Reset.
An explanation of the Hotkey actions is given in the table below:
Action Explanation
Exit remote location Exits the remote view. This is equivalent to clicking the Exit icon
on the Control Panel. The default keys are F2, F3, F4.
Adjust Video Brings up the Video Settings dialog box. This is equivalent to
clicking the Video Settings icon on the Control Panel. The default
keys are F5, F6, F7.
Toggle Control
Panel
Toggles the Control Panel Off and On. The default keys are F3,
F4, F5.
Toggle Mouse
Display
If you find the display of the two mouse pointers (local and
remote) to be confusing or annoying, you can use this function to
shrink the non-functioning pointer down to a barely noticeable
tiny circle, which can be ignored. Since this function is a toggle,
use the hotkeys again to bring the mouse display back to its
original configuration. This is equivalent to selecting the Dot
pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel.
The default keys are F7, F8, F9.
Note: The Java Control Panel does not have this feature.
Adjust mouse This synchronizes the local and remote mouse movements. The
default keys are F8, F7, F6.
Video Auto-sync This combination performs an auto-sync operation. It is
equivalent to clicking the Video Autosync icon on the Control
Panel. The default keys are F6, F7, F8.
Show/Hide Local
Cursor
Toggles the display of your local mouse pointer off and on. This is
equivalent to selecting the Null pointer type from the Mouse
Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F4,F5.
Substitute Ctrl key If your local computer captures Ctrl key combinations, preventing
them from being sent to the remote system, you can implement
their effects on the remote system by specifying a function key to
substitute for the Ctrl key. If you substitute the F11 key, for
example, pressing [F11 + 5] would appear to the remote system
as [Ctrl + 5]. The default key is F11.
Substitute Alt key Although all other keyboard input is captured and sent to the
remote system, [Alt + Tab] and [Ctrl + Alt + Del] work on your
local computer. In order to implement their effects on the remote
system, another key may be substituted for the Alt key. If you
substitute the F12 key, for example, you would use [F12 + Tab]
and [Ctrl + F12 + Del]. The default key is F12.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
292
Video Settings
The Video Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the placement and
picture quality of the remote screen display on your monitor.
The adjustment options are as follows:
Option Usage
Click this to control the transparency of the Video Settings dialog
box.
Performance Select the type of Internet connection that exists between the
Local Client computer and the unit. The unit will use that
selection to automatically adjust the Video Quality settings to
optimize the quality of the video display.
Since network conditions vary, if none of the preset choices seem
to work well, you can select Customize and use the Video
Quality slider bars to adjust the settings to suit your conditions.
Advanced See page 293 for details.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
293
Gamma Adjustment
For greater control and if it is necessary to correct the gamma level for the
remote video display, use the Gamma function of the Advanced Video
Settings by clicking the Advanced button.
For gamma level, there are ten preset and four user-defined levels to choose
from. Click the drop-down menu and choose the most suitable one.
The additional options in the Advanced screen are as follows:
Option Usage
RGB Drag the slider bars to adjust the RGB (Red, Green, Blue)
values. When an RGB value is increased, the RGB component of
the image is correspondingly increased.
If you enable Set to Grayscale, the remote video display is
changed to grayscale.
Gamma This section allows you to adjust the video display’s gamma
level.
Click and drag the diagonal line at as many points as you wish to
achieve the display output you desire.
Click Save As to save up to four user-defined configurations
derived from this method. Saved configurations can be recalled
from the list box at a future time.
Click Reset to abandon any changes and return the gamma line
to its original diagonal position.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
294
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
Click Cancel to abandon your changes and close the dialog box.
Note: For best results, change the gamma while viewing a remote computer.
Video Quality Drag the slider bar to adjust the overall video quality. The larger
the value, the clearer the picture and the more video data goes
through the network. Depending on the network bandwidth, a
high value may adversely affect response time.
Enable Refresh The unit can redraw the screen every 1 to 99 seconds,
eliminating unwanted artifacts from the screen. Select Enable
Refresh and enter a number from 1 through 99. The unit will
redraw the screen at the interval you specify. This feature is
disabled by default. Click to put a check mark in the box next to
Enable Refresh to enable this feature.
Note: 1. The switch starts counting the time interval when
mouse movement stops.
2. Enabling this feature increases the volume of video
data transmitted over the network. The lower the
number specified, the more often the video data is
transmitted. Setting too low a value may adversely
affect overall operating responsiveness.
Transparency Drag the slider bars to adjust the transparency of the remote
display.
Color Depth Control This setting determines the richness of the video display by
adjusting the amount of color information.
Option Usage
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
295
Virtual Media
The Virtual Media feature allows a drive, folder, image file, or
removable disk on a local client computer to appear and act as if it were
installed on the remote server.
Virtual Media also supports a smart card reader function that allows a reader
plugged into a local client computer to appear as if it were plugged into the
remote server.
Virtual Media Icons
The Virtual Media icon on the Control Panel changes to indicate whether the
virtual media function is available, or if a virtual media device has already been
mounted on the remote server, as shown in the table below:
Virtual Media Redirection
To implement the virtual media redirection feature, do the following:
1. Click the Virtual Media icon to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box:
Icon Function
The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual
media function is disabled or not available.
The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual
media function is available. Click the icon to bring up the virtual
media dialog box.
The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that a virtual media
device has been mounted on the remote server. Click the icon to
unmount all redirected devices.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
296
2. Click Add and select the media source.
Depending on your selection, additional dialog boxes appear enabling you
to select the drive, file, folder, or removable disk you desire. See Virtual
Media Support, page 399 for details about mounting these media types.
3. To add additional media sources, click Add, and select the source.
Up to three virtual media choices can be added. To rearrange the selection
order, highlight the device you want to move, then click the Up or Down
Arrow button to promote or demote it in the list.
4. Read refers to the redirected device being able to send data to the remote
server. Write refers to the redirected device being able to have data from
the remote server written to it. The default is Read. If you want the
redirected device to be writable, check the Enable Write checkbox:
Note: 1. If a redirected device cannot be written to, or if a user does not
have write permissions, it appears in gray and cannot be selected.
2. See Virtual Media Support, page 399, for a list of supported
virtual media types.
5. To remove an entry from the list, highlight it and click Remove.
6. After you have made your media source selections, click Mount. The
dialog box closes. The virtual media devices that you have selected are
redirected to the remote system, where they show up as drives, files and
folders on the remote system’s file system.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
297
Once mounted, you can treat the virtual media as if they were really on the
remote server – drag and drop files to/from them; open files on the remote
system for editing and save them to the redirected media, etc.
Files that you save to the redirected media will actually be saved on your
local system. Files that you drag from the redirected media will actually
come from your local system.
7. To end the redirection, bring up the Control Panel and click on the Virtual
Media icon. All mounted devices are automatically unmounted.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
298
Smart Card Reader
Note: This feature is only available when using the WinClient Viewer or the
Windows Client AP.
The smart card reader function allows a reader plugged into a local client
computer’s USB port to be redirected, and appear as if it were plugged into the
remote server. One purpose of smart cards (Common Access Cards, for
example), is to allow authentication to the remote server from the local client.
When a smart card reader is connected to the local client computer, an entry for
it appears when you bring up the Virtual Media dialog box and click Add:
Make your selection and click Mount to complete the redirection.
Zoom
The Zoom icon controls the zoom factor for the remote view window.
Settings are as follows:
Setting Description
100% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 100%.
75% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 75%.
50% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 50%.
25% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 25%.
1:1 Sizes and displays the remote view window at 100%. The difference
between this setting and the 100% setting is that when the remote
view window is resized its contents don’t resize – they remain at the
size they were. To see any objects that are outside of the viewing
area move the mouse to the window edge, to have the screen scroll.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
299
The On-Screen Keyboard
The unit supports an on-screen keyboard, available in multiple
languages, with all the standard keys for each supported language.
Click this icon to pop up the on-screen keyboard:
One of the major advantages of the on-screen keyboard is that if the keyboard
languages of the remote and local systems are not the same, you do not have to
change the configuration settings for either system. The user just has to bring
up the on-screen keyboard; select the language used by the computer on the
port he is accessing; and use the on-screen keyboard to communicate with it.
Note: You must use your mouse to click on the keys. You cannot use your
actual keyboard.
To change languages, do the following:
1. Click the down arrow next to the currently selected language to drop down
the language list.
2. Select the new language from the list.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
300
To display/hide the expanded keyboard keys, click the arrow to the right of
the language list arrow.
Mouse Pointer Type
The CN9600 offers a number of mouse pointer options when working
in the remote display. Click this icon to select the type that you would
like to work with:
Note: 1. The Dot pointer is not available with the Java Client Viewer or the
Java Client AP.
2. Selecting the Single pointer has the same effect as the Toggle mouse
display hotkey function (see Toggle Mouse Display, page 291 for
details).
3. The icon on the Control Panel changes to match your choice.
Mouse DynaSync Mode
Clicking this icon selects whether synchronization of the local and
remote mouse pointers is accomplished either automatically or
manually.
The icon on the toolbar indicates the synchronization mode status as follows:
Icon Function
The green mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is
available and is enabled. This is the default setting when Mouse
DynaSync is available.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
301
When Mouse DynaSync is available, clicking the icon toggles between enabled
and disabled. If you choose to disable Mouse DynaSync mode, you must use
the manual syncing procedures described in the next section.
Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync)
Mouse DynaSync provides automatic locked-in syncing of the remote and local
mouse pointers – eliminating the need to constantly re-sync the two
movements.
Manual Mouse Synchronization
If you are using Manual mouse synchronization instead of automatic
DynaSync and the local mouse pointer goes out of sync with the remote
system's mouse pointer, there are a number of methods to bring them back into
sync:
1. Invoke the Adjust Mouse function with the Adjust Mouse hotkeys (see
Adjust mouse, page 291, for details).
2. Move the pointer into all 4 corners of the screen (in any order).
3. Drag the Control Panel to a different position on the screen.
4. Set the mouse speed and acceleration for each problematic computer
attached to the switch. See Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures,
page 397, for instructions.
The red mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is
available but is not enabled.
Icon Function
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
302
Control Panel Configuration
Clicking the Customize Control Panel icon brings up a dialog box that
allows you to configure the items that appear on the Control Panel, as
well as its graphical settings:
The dialog box is organized into five main sections as described in the table
below:
Item Description
Customize
Control Panel
Allows you to select which icons are displayed in the Control Panel.
Control Panel
Style
Enabling Transparent makes the Control Panel semi-transparent,
so that you can see through it to the display underneath.
Enabling Icon causes the Control Panel to display as an icon until
you mouse over it. When you mouse over the icon, the full panel
comes up.
Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)
303
Screen Options
If Full Screen Mode is enabled, the remote display fills the entire
screen.
If Full Screen Mode is not enabled, the remote display appears as
a window on the client desktop. If the remote screen is larger than
what is able to fit in the window, scroll bars will appear.
If Keep Screen Size is enabled, the remote screen is not resized.
If the remote resolution is smaller than that of the client
monitor, its display appears like a window centered on the
screen.
If the remote resolution is larger than that of the client monitor,
its display is scaled to the client monitor size.
If Keep Screen Size is not enabled, the remote screen is resized
to fit the client monitor's resolution.
Scrolling
Method
In cases where the remote screen display is larger than your monitor,
you can choose how to scroll to the areas that are off-screen.
If you select Mouse Movement, the screen will scroll when you
move the mouse pointer to your screen border.
If you select Scroll Bars, scroll bars appear around the screen
borders that you can use to scroll to the off-screen areas.
User Info If User Numbers is enabled, the total number of users logged into the
unit displays beside the resolution on the second row of the Control
Panel (See the Control Panel diagram on page 287 for an example.)
Snapshot These settings let the user configure the unit’s screen capture
parameters (see the Snapshot description under The Control Panel,
page 287):
Path lets you select a directory that the captured screens
automatically get saved to. Click Browse; navigate to the directory
of your choice; then click OK. If you don’t specify a directory here,
the snapshot is saved to your desktop.
Click a radio button to choose whether you want the captured
screen to be saved as a BMP or a JPEG (JPG) file.
If you choose JPEG, you can select the quality of the captured file
with the slider bar. The higher the quality, the better looking the
image, but the larger the file size.
Keyboard Pass
Through
When this is enabled, the Alt-Tab key press is passed to the remote
server and affects that server. If it is not enabled, Alt-Tab acts on your
local client computer.
Window Title Use the drop-down menu to select which remote server information is
displayed on the window title.
Item Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
304
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
305
Chapter 12
Firmware Upgrade Utility
The Windows-based Firmware Upgrade Utility (FWUpgrade.exe) provides a
smooth, automated process for upgrading the firmware. The Utility comes as
part of a Firmware Upgrade Package that is specific for each device. New
firmware upgrade packages are posted on our web site as new firmware
revisions become available. Check the web site regularly to find the latest
packages and information relating to them:
http://www.aten.com
For browser based firmware upgrade, please refer to FW Upgrade on page 262.
Preparation
1. From a computer that is not part of your installation go to our Internet
support site and choose the model name that relates to your KE device to
get a list of available Firmware Upgrade Packages.
2. Choose the Firmware Upgrade Package you want to install (usually the
most recent), and download it to your computer.
3. Be sure that the computer is connected to the same LAN segment as the
KE devices.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
306
Starting the Upgrade
To upgrade your firmware:
1. Run the downloaded Firmware Upgrade Package file - either by double
clicking the file icon, or by opening a command line and entering the full
path to it. The Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome screen appears:
Note: The screens shown in this section are for reference only.
2. Read the License Agreement (enable the I Agree radio button).
3. Click Next. The Firmware Upgrade Utility main screen appears:
Chapter 12. Firmware Upgrade Utility
307
4. The Utility inspects your installation. All the devices capable of being
upgraded by the package are listed in the Select Master Device list.
5. After you have made your device selection, Click OK and then Next to
begin the upgrade.
If you enabled Check Firmware Version, the Utility compares the device’s
firmware level with that of the upgrade files. If it finds that the device’s
version is higher than the upgrade version, it brings up a dialog box
informing you of the situation and gives you the option to Continue or
Cancel.
If you didn’t enable Check Firmware Version, the Utility installs the
upgrade files without checking whether they are a higher level, or not.
As the Upgrade proceeds status messages appear in the Status Messages
panel, and the progress toward completion is shown on the Progress bar.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
308
Upgrade Succeeded
After the upgrade has completed, a screen appears to inform you that the
procedure was successful:
Chapter 12. Firmware Upgrade Utility
309
Firmware Upgrade Recovery
If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is
abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may
become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed
or interrupted upgrade, do the following
1. Power off the KE device.
2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.
3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.
4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the
failure.
5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
310
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
311
Chapter 13
CLI Commands
Serial Control Protocol Commands
The KE Series’s built-in bi-directional RS-232 serial interface and LAN port
connection allows system control via Receivers through a high-end controller
or PC. This control feature can also be accessed via TCP/IP through a computer
running Telnet. The port for Telnet commands should be set to 9130.
Configuring the Serial Port
The controller’s serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver’s
default configuration, as shown below:
The Receiver’s Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 12).
Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KE
Matrix Manager software on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the
Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure
the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.
On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session. Please press
"Enter"or "T/t" to start “CLI Session” or "Text Menu".
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
312
Device/Profile Commands
When typing a device or profile into a command string, you can enter the name
by: IP address (device only), ID or @ with the List number for the device/
profile in the command line interface.
Note: To find out about the List number for a device/profile, execute a List
command (page 328).
Telnet
The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session
using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first
setup and connected to the network.
To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the
following:
1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.
2. At the prompt, key in the KE device’s IP address with port 9130 in the
following way:
telnet [IP address] [port]
3. Press Enter. The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the
Password.
Verification
After sending a command, a verification message appears at the end of the
command line. Use the echo command to identify a command by number:
Command OK - the command is correct and performed successfully
Command incorrect - the command has the wrong format and/or values.
Echo Command - at the end of a command string, type: e1234 – where
1234 can be any number. The verification message returns with the echo
number.
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
313
Switch Port Command
The formula for Switch Port commands is as follows:
Command + Output + Num1 + Input + Num2 + Mode + Stream +
Connect + [Enter]
1. For example, if you want to switch the Receiver’s connection to
Transmitter (192.168.0.20), type the following:
sw i192.168.0.20 [Enter]
2. For example, if you want to disconnect the Receiver from its Transmitter
connections, type the following:
sw off [Enter]
3. For example, if you want to connect Receiver (192.168.0.99) to
Transmitter (192.168.0.79) with exclusive access to stream video and
audio, type the following:
sw o192.168.0.99 i192.168.0.79 exclusive video audio on [Enter]
4. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.11) from the video stream
and return it to the OSD menu, type the following:
sw o192.168.0.11 off [Enter]
5. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.09) from the video stream
and logout the OSD, type the following:
sw o192.168.0.09 logout [Enter]
6. For example, to disconnect the Receiver’s USB stream, type the
following:
sw usb off [Enter]
7. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 5th Transmitter listed in the
command line interface, type the following:
sw i@5 exclusive all on [Enter]
8. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 7th Transmitter listed in the
command line interface with echo command 4312, type the following:
sw i@7 exclusive all on e4312
9. For example, to switch Receiver (192.168.0.12) to the 14th Transmitter
listed in the command line interface with occupy access to stream video
audio and USB, type the following:
sw o192.168.0.12 i@14 occupy video audio usb on [Enter]
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
314
The following tables show the possible values for the Switch Port commands:
Command Description
sw Switch port command
Output Description
o Output port command (RX)
Num1 Description
xx Output port
xx: Receiver ID or IP address
@zz List #
zz: 1~99
To use the 4th Receiver listed in
the command line interface,
type: o@4
Input Description
i Input command (TX)
Num2 Description
yy Input port
yy: Transmitter ID or IP address
@zz List #
zz: 1~99
To use the 8th Transmitter listed
in the command line interface,
type: i@8
Mode Description
exclusive Sets the Access Mode to
exclusive.
share Sets the Access Mode to share.
occupy Sets the Access Mode to occupy.
viewonly Sets the Access Mode to view
only. If the mode is omitted, view
only is used by default.
Stream Description
video Sets the video source stream
audio Sets the audio source stream
serial Sets the serial source stream
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
315
The following table lists the available Switch Port commands:
usb Sets the USB source stream
all Sets all source streams
Connect Description
on Connect
off Disconnect
logout Logout OSD
Command Output Num1 Input Num2 Mode Stream Con-
nect
Description
sw o xx i yy exclusive video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch output xx to input
yy with exclusive access
to source(s).
xx: Receiver ID
yy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx i yy share video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch output xx to input
yy with share access to
stream source(s).
xx: Receiver ID
yy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx i yy occupy video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch output xx to input
yy with occupy access to
stream source(s).
xx: Receiver ID
yy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx i yy viewonly video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch output xx to input
yy with viewonly access
to stream source(s).
xx: Receiver ID
yy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx off Switch output xx,
disconnect streams,
return to OSD menu.
xx: Receiver ID
sw o xx logout Switch output xx,
disconnect streams and
logout from OSD menu.
xx: Receiver ID
sw video
audio
serial
usb
all
off Switch Receiver
stream(s) to disconnect.
Stream Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
316
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. The Mode command string can be skipped and view only will be used
by default.
3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local
Receiver.
sw off Switch Receiver
disconnect streams,
return to OSD menu.
sw i @zz exclusive
share
occupy
viewonly
video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch Receiver to input
@zz with [mode] access
to stream source(s).
zz: Transmitter # by
order listed in the
command line interface.
sw o xx i @zz exclusive video
audio
serial
usb
all
on Switch output xx to input
@zz with [mode] access
to stream source(s).
xx: Receiver ID
zz: Transmitter # by
order listed in command
line interface.
Command Output Num1 Input Num2 Mode Stream Con-
nect
Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
317
Mute Command
The Mute command allows you to enable or disable the audio.
The formula for the Mute command is as follows:
Command + Output + Num1 + Control + [Enter]
1. For example, to turn mute off (audio on) for the Receiver, type the
following:
mute off [Enter]
2. For example, to turn mute on for Receiver (192.168.0.11), type the
following:
mute o192.168.0.11 on [Enter]
3. For example, to turn mute off for Receiver (192.168.0.18), type the
following:
mute o192.168.0.18 off [Enter]
The following tables show the possible valu es f or the Mute commands:
The following table lists the available Mute commands:
Command Description
mute Mute command
Output Description
o Output port command
Num1 Description
xx Output number
xx: Receiver ID or IP address
Control Description
on Mute on; audio disabled
off Mute off; audio enabled (default)
Command Output Num1 Control Description
mute o xx on Turn mute on for output xx
xx: Receiver ID
mute o xx off Turn mute off for output xx
xx: Receiver ID
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
318
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. The Control command string can be skipped and off will be used by
default.
3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local
Receiver.
mute on Turn mute on for Receiver
mute off Turn mute off for Receiver
Command Output Num1 Control Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
319
Profile Command
The Profile command allows you to connect profiles and video walls.
The formula for Profile commands is as follows:
Command + Profile + Num1 + Control + [Enter]
1. For example, to connect profile 8 and lock the OSD menu, type the
following:
profile f8 [Enter]
2. For example, to connect profile 4 with access to the OSD menu, type the
following:
profile f4 release [Enter]
3. For example, to disconnect profile 12 and return to the Receiver to the
OSD menu, type the following:
profile f12 back [Enter]
The following tables show th e possible values f or the Profile commands:
Command Description
profile Profile command
Profile Description
f Profile ID
Num1 Description
xx Profile or Video Wall ID
xx: 1-99
Control Description
lock Connect profile, lock access to
OSD menu (default)
release Connect profile, allow access to
OSD menu
back Disconnect profile, return
Receiver to OSD menu
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
320
The following table lists the available Profile commands:
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. The Control command string can be skipped and lock will be used by
default.
3. For functional lock and release commands, make sure the Lock OSD
when connecting option is checked during Create Profile. Refer to
Lock OSD, page 244 for more information.
Command Profile Num1 Control Description
profile f xx lock Connect profile xx, lock
OSD access
xx:1~99
profile f xx release Connect profile xx, allow
OSD access
xx:1~99
profile f xx back Disconnect profile xx
and return Receiver to
OSD menu
xx: 1~99
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
321
EDID Command
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a data that contains a display's
basic information and is used to communicate with the video source. The EDID
commands allow you to change the EDID setting of a Transmitter. For more
information on configuring EDID settings, see Properties, page 149.
The formula for the EDID command is as follows:
Command + Address + Number + Control + [Enter]
1. For example, if you want to configure device (192.168.0.3) to use the
remix EDID mode, type the following:
edid a192.168.0.3 remix [Enter]
The following tables show th e possible values for the EDID commands:
Command Description
edid EDID command
Address Description
a Address command
Number Description
xx Address number
xx: Receiver ID or IP address
Control Description
auto Checks the EDID of all connected
displays and the ATEN default EDID to
use the best common resolution for all
displays.
remix Manually checks the EDID of all
connected displays and the ATEN default
EDID to use the best common resolution
for all displays (see EDID Mode,
page 161).
default Implements ATEN’s default EDID.
(default)
manual Manually set the EDID configuration from
the Receiver’s OSD (see EDID Mode,
page 161).
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
322
The following table lists the available EDID commands:
Command Address Number Control Enter Description
edid a xx auto [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to auto.
xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx remix [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to remix.
xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx default [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to
default.
xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx manual [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to
manual.
xx: Device ID or IP Address
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
323
Reset Command
The Reset command allows you to reset a device back to the default factory
settings. Reset includes resetting the devices IP address.
Note: The Reset command resets everything but the login information to the
factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All
Information on page 381.
The formula for the Reset command is as follows:
Command + Address + Number + [Enter]
1. For example, to reset device (192.168.0.95), type the following:
reset a192.168.0.95 [Enter]
2. For example, to reset the Receiver, type the following:
reset [Enter]
The following tables show th e possible values f o r the Reset command:
The following table lists the available Reset commands:
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. Skip the Address and Number command strings to reset the local
Receiver.
Command Description
reset Reset command
Address Description
a Address command
Number Description
xx Address number
xx: Receiver ID or IP address
Command Address Num Enter Description
reset a xx [Enter] Reset address xx back to the
factory default settings
xx: Device ID or IP Address
reset [Enter] Resets the Receiver settings
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
324
RS-232 Command
The RS-232 command allows you to set the RS-232 settings for a device.
The formula for the RS-232 command is as follows:
Command + Address + Number + Baud Rate + Parity + Data Bit +
Stop Bit + Flow Control [Enter]
1. For example, to set device (192.168.0.33) with a baud rate of 38400, parity
of none, data bit of 8, and stop bit of 1, type the following:
baud a192.168.0.33 38400 none 8 1 [Enter]
2. For example, to set the local device with a baud rate of 19200, type the
following:
baud 19200 [Enter]
The following tables s how the possible values for the RS-232 command:
Command Description
baud RS-232 command
Address Description
a Address command
Num1 Description
xx Address number
xx: Device ID or IP address
Baud Rate Description
9600 Use 9600 baud rate
19200 Use 19200 baud rate
38400 Use 38400 baud rate
115200 Use 115200 baud rate
Parity Description
None Sets the parity to none
Even Sets the parity to even
Odd Sets the parity to odd
Data Bit Description
5 Sets the data bit to 5
6 Sets the data bit to 6
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
325
The following table lists the available Baud Rate commands:
7 Sets the data bit to 7
8 Sets the data bit to 8
Stop Bit Description
1 Sets the stop bit to 1
2 Sets the stop bit to 2
Flow Control Description
None Sets flow control to none
Hardware Sets flow control to hardware
Xon Sets flow control to Xon
Xoff Sets flow control to Xoff
Com
mand Address Num
1
Baud
Rate Parity Data
Bit
Stop
Bit
Flow
Control Description
baud a xx 9600 None
Even
Odd
5
6
7
8
1
2
None
Hardware
Xon/Xoff
Set address xx
baud rate to
9600, with
parity/ data bit/
stop bit / flow
control setting
baud a xx 19200 None
Even
Odd
5
6
7
8
1
2
None
Hardware
Xon/Xoff
Set address xx
baud rate to
19200, with
parity/ data bit/
stop bit / flow
control setting
baud a xx 38400 None
Even
Odd
5
6
7
8
1
2
None
Hardware
Xon/Xoff
Set address xx
baud rate to
38400, with
parity/ data bit/
stop bit / flow
control setting
baud a xx 115200 None
Even
Odd
5
6
7
8
1
2
None
Hardware
Xon/Xoff
Set address xx
baud rate to
115200, with
parity/ data bit/
stop bit / flow
control setting
Data Bit Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
326
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. The Baud Rate value is required but Parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit
can be skipped and their setting will not change.
3. Skip the Address and Number command strings to configure the
local device settings.
baud 9600 Set local device
baud rate to
9600
baud 19200 Set local device
baud rate to
19200
baud 38400 Set local device
baud rate to
38400
baud 115200 Set local device
baud rate to
115200
Com
mand Address Num
1
Baud
Rate Parity Data
Bit
Stop
Bit
Flow
Control Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
327
OSD Command
To enable or disable the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu for a Receiver, use
the following command:
Command + Output + Number + Control + [Enter]
1. For example, to enable the OSD for Receiver 192.168.0.51, type:
osd o192.168.0.51 on [Enter]
2. For example, to disable the OSD for the local Receiver, type:
osd off [Enter]
The following tables show the possible values for the OSD command:
The following table lists the available OSD commands:
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. Skip the Output and Number command strings to configure the local
Receiver.
Command Description
osd OSD command
Output Description
o Output command
Number Description
xx Output number
xx: Receiver ID or IP address
Control Description
on Enable OSD functions
off Disable OSD functions (default)
Comman
dOutput Number Control Enter Description
osd
oxx
on [Enter] Enable OSD functions for
output xx
xx: Receiver ID or IP
address
osd
oxx
off [Enter] Disable OSD functions for
output xx off (default)
xx: Receiver ID or IP
address
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
328
List Command
The List command allows you to retrieve information about users, settings and
connections.
The formula for the List command is as follows:
Command + Output + Input + Number + Control [Enter]
1. For example, for a complete list of available channels, type the following:
list channel [Enter]
2. For example, for a complete list of available profiles, type the following:
list profile [Enter]
3. For example, to list all users logged into all OSD menus, type the
following:
4. list login [Enter]
5. For example, to list the user logged into the OSD on Receiver
(192.168.0.44), type the following:
list o192.168.0.44 login [Enter]
6. For example, for a complete list of available connections, type the
following:
list connection [Enter]
7. For example, to list the current connections on Transmitter (192.168.0.88),
type the following:
list i192.168.0.88 connection [Enter]
The following tables s how the possibl e valu es f or the List command
:
Command Description
list List command
Output Description
o Output command
Input Description
i Input command
Number Description
xx Output or Input number
xx: Device ID or IP address
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
329
The following table lists the available List commands:
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to view the
local Receiver.
Control Description
channel Lists information about the available
channel(s)
profile Lists information about the available
profile and TV wall connections
rx Lists information about the Receiver
login Lists information about users logged
into to the OSD menu
connection Lists information about a Transmitters
current connections
Comman
dOutput Input Number Control Description
list o xx login List output xx user
logged into OSD.
list o xx rx List output xx Receiver
information
list i xx connection List input xx
Transmitter information
list channel List all available
channel information
list profile List all available profile
information
list rx List information about
all Receivers
list login List information about
all OSD logins
list connection List information about
all connections
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
330
Read Command
The Read command allows you to retrieve the properties of a device.
The formula for the Read command is as follows:
Command + Output + Input + Number + Control [Enter]
1. For example, to read all of the local Receiver’s properties, type the
following:
read all [Enter]
2. For example, to read all of Receiver (192.168.0.19) device properties, type
the following:
read o192.168.0.19 all [Enter]
3. For example, to read all of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) device properties,
type the following:
read i192.168.0.28 all [Enter]
4. For example, to read the basic properties of Receiver (192.168.0.61), type
the following:
read o192.168.0.61 basic [Enter]
5. For example, to read the network properties of Transmitter (192.168.0.71),
type the following:
read i192.168.0.71 network [Enter]
The following tables show the possible values for the Read command
:
Command Description
read Read command
Output Description
o Output command
Input Description
i Input command
Number Description
xx Output or Input number
xx: Device ID or IP address
Control Description
all Read all device properties
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
331
The following table lists the available Read commands:
basic Read basic properties
network Read network properties
ipsettings Read IP settings
rs232 Read RS232 properties
properties Read connection properties
manager Read KE Matrix Manager software
properties
streams Read enable media properties
tx Read source stream IP properties
(Receiver)
usbmode Read USB mode properties
(Receiver)
multicast Read multicast properties
(Transmitter)
videoqtyadvanced Read advanced video properties
(Transmitter)
ossettings Read OS properties
(Transmitter)
Comman
dOutput Input Number Control Description
read o i xx all Read output or input xx
all device properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx basic Read output or input xx
basic properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx network Read output or input xx
network properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx ipsettings Read output or input xx
IP address properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
Control Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
332
read o i xx rs232 Read output or input xx
RS-232 properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx properties Read output or input xx
connection properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx manager Read output or input xx
KE Matrix Manager IP
and port properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o i xx streams Read output or input xx
enable media
properties
xx: Device ID or IP
address
read o xx tx Read output xx source
stream IP address
properties
xx: Receiver ID or IP
address
read o xx usbmode Read output xx USB
mode properties
xx: Receiver ID or IP
address
read i xx multicast Read input xx multicast
properties
xx: Transmitter ID or IP
address
read i xx videoqtyad
vanced
Read input xx
advanced video
properties
xx: Transmitter ID or IP
address
read i xx ossettings Read input xx OS
properties
xx: Transmitter ID or IP
address
read all Read all properties of
local Receiver
Comman
dOutput Input Number Control Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
333
Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to read the
local Receiver properties.
read basic
network
ipsettings
rs232
properties
manager
streams
tx
usbmode
Read [control]
properties of local
Receiver.
Comman
dOutput Input Number Control Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
334
Set Command
The Set command allows you to configure the properties of a device. Some
settings require that both the device and Matrix Manager are online or the
command will fail.
The formula for the Set command is as follows:
Command + Output + Input + Number + Control + Value + [Enter]
1. For example, to set the name of the local Receiver to KE6940TX1, type
the following:
set Name=KE6940TX1 [Enter]
2. For example, to set the description of Transmitter (192.168.0.33) to KE
Room B, type the following:
set o192.168.0.19 Description=KE Room B [Enter]
3. For example, to set the DHCP settings of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) to
static, type the following:
set i192.168.0.28 dhcpFlag=STATIC [Enter]
4. For example, to set the IP settings of the local Receiver to 192.168.0.2,
type the following:
set ipAddr=192.168.0.2 [Enter]
5. For example, to set the Transmitter Video IP setting to 192.168.0.44 for
Receiver (192.168.0.56), type the following:
set o192.168.0.56 TxVideoIP=192.168.0.44 [Enter]
The following tables s how the possibl e values for the Set command
:
Command Description
set Set command
Output Description
o Output command
Input Description
i Input command
Number Description
xx Output or Input number
xx: Device ID or IP address
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
335
Control Description
Name Sets the device name
Description Sets the device description
ipInstallerFlag Sets the IP installer option
dhcpFlag Sets the DHCP setting
ipAddr Sets the IP address
netmask Sets the subnet mask
gw Sets the default gateway
modeFlag Sets the device mode
BaudRate Sets the baud rate setting
Parity Sets the parity setting
DataBit Sets the data bit setting
StopBit Sets the stop bit setting
FlowCtrl Sets the flow control setting
TxVideoIP Sets the Transmitter video IP setting
TxAudioIP Sets the Transmitter audio IP setting
TxUSBIP Sets the Transmitter USB IP setting
TxRSIP Sets the Transmitter RS-232 IP setting
VideoEnFlag Sets the (enable media) video source
stream
AudioEnFlag Sets the (enable media) audio source
stream
USBEnFlag Sets the (enable media) USB source
stream
RSEnFlag Sets the (enable media) RS232
source stream
ManagerIP Sets the KE Matrix Manager software
IP
ManagerPort Sets the KE Matrix Manager software
port
Beeper Sets the beeper
RxVM Sets the USB mode setting
USBSecure Sets the USB encryption
PortOS Sets the port OS setting
OSLanguage Sets the OS language
videoMCastEn Sets the enable multicast video setting
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
336
The following table lists the available Set commands:
audioMCastEn Sets the enable multicast audio setting
Edid Sets the EDID mode selection setting
VideoType Sets the video type setting
ColorDepth Sets the color depth setting
BandwidthLimit Sets the bandwidth limit setting
VideoQty Sets the video quality setting
BGRefresh Sets the background refresh setting
Beeper Sets the beeper setting
OccupyTimeout Sets the occupy timeout setting
Resolution Sets the resolution setting
Value Description
=yy Set value to yy
yy: Enter a value that corresponds to
the control being used
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
Set o i xx Name yy Set output or input xx
Name to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: Name value
Set o i xx Description yy Set output or input xx
Description to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: Description value
Set o i xx ipInstallerFlag yy Set output or input xx
ipInstallerFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, viewonly,
disable
Control Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
337
Set o i xx dhcpFlag yy Set output or input xx
dhcpFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: dhcp, static
Set o i xx ipAddr yy Set output or input xx
ipAddr to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: IP address value
Set o i xx netmask yy Set output or input xx
netmask to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: Subnet mask value
Set o i xx gw yy Set output or input xx
gw to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: Default gateway
value
Set o i xx modeFlag yy Set output or input xx
modeFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: extender, matrix
Set o i xx BaudRate yy Set output or input xx
BaudRate to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 9600, 19200,
38400, 115200
Set o i xx Parity yy Set output or input xx
Parity to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: none, even, odd
Set o i xx DataBit yy Set output or input xx
DataBit to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 5, 6, 7, 8
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
338
Set o i xx StopBit yy Set output or input xx
StopBit to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 1, 1.5, 2
Set o i xx FlowCtrl yy Set output or input xx
FlowCtrl to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: none, hardware,
Xon, Xoff
Set o i xx TxVideoIP yy Set output xx
TxVideoIP to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: IP address value
Set o xx TxAudioIP yy Set output xx
TxAudioIP to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: IP address value
Set o xx TxUSBIP yy Set output xx TxUSBIP
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: IP address value
Set o xx TxRSIP yy Set output xx TxRSIP
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: IP address value
Set o i xx VideoEnFlag yy Set output or input xx
VideoEnFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set o i xx AudioEnFlag yy Set output or input xx
AudioEnFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
339
Set o i xx USBEnFlag yy Set output or input xx
USBEnFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set o i xx RSEnFlag yy Set output or input xx
RSEnFlag to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set o i xx ManagerIP yy Set output or input xx
ManagerIP to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: KE Matrix Manager
software IP address
Set o i xx ManagerPort yy Set output or input xx
ManagerPort to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: KE Matrix Manager
software port
Set o i xx Beeper yy Set output or input xx
Beeper to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set o xx RxVM yy Set output xx RxVM to
yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: vm, vusb
Set o xx USBSecure yy Set output xx
USBSecure to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: on, off
Set i xx PortOS yy Set input xx PortOS to
yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: win, mac, sun, other
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
340
Set i xx OSLanguage yy Set input xx
OSLanguage to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: english, japanese,
french, german,
spanish, korean,
chinese(traditional),
english(uk), swedish,
arabic, belgian,
canadian-bilingual,
french(canada), czech,
danish, finnish, greek,
hebrew, hungarian,
international(iso),
italian, latin american,
dutch, norwegian,
persian(farsi), polish,
portuguese, russian,
slovak, french
(switzerland), german
(switzerland),
switzerland, reserved,
turkish-q, reserved,
serbo-croatian
Set i xx videoMCastEn yy Set input xx
videoMCastEn to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set i xx audioMCastEn yy Set input xx
audioMCastEn to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: enable, disable
Set i xx Edid yy Set input xx Edid to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: default, auto,
manual, remix
Set i xx VideoType yy Set input xx VideoType
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: dvi-d, dvi-a
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
Chapter 13. CLI Commands
341
Set i xx ColorDepth yy Set input xx ColorDepth
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 8, 16, 24,
and 36 (only for KE89
Series)
Set i xx BandwidthLimit yy Set input xx
BandwidthLimit to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: unlimited, 100, 200,
500
Set i xx VideoQty yy Set input xx VideoQty
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Set i xx BGRefresh yy Set input xx BGRefresh
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: off, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256
Set i xx OccupyTimeout yy Set input xx
OccupyTimeout to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 1~240
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual
342
Set i xx Resolution yy Set input xx Resolution
to yy
xx: Device ID or IP
address
yy: 1920x1200,
1920x1080,
1680x1050,
1600x1200, 1600x900,
1440x900, 1400x1050,
1366x768, 1280x1024,
1280x960, 1280x720,
1152x864, 1024x768,
800x600, 720x400,
640x480, 2560x1080*,
3840x2160*,
1920x1440*,
2560x1600*,
2560x1440*,
2048x1536*
*Only for KE89 Series
Comm
and Output Input Number Control Value Description
343
Appendix
Safety Instructions
General
This product is for indoor use only.
Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device.
Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If
the device falls, serious damage will result.
Do not use the device near water.
Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers.
The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for
adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against
overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered.
The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as
this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be
placed in a built in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided.
Never spill liquid of any kind on the device.
Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know
the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical
specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous
condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a
fire and destroy equipment.
Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on
the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available,
consult your dealer or local power company.
To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are
properly grounded.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the
power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over.
Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing
rests on any cables.
UPS User Manual
344
Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire
or electrical shock.
Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet
and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair.
The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed.
Liquid has been spilled into the device.
The device has been exposed to rain or water.
The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged.
The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need
for service.
The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions
are followed.
Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions.
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will
require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.
Appendix
345
Rack Mount
Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to
the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on
the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front
stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.
Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the
rack first.
Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from
the rack.
Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a
device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a
locking position, and then slide the device into the rack.
Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the
rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit
rating.
Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and
other electrical connectors – is properly grounded.
Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack.
Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment
does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the
equipment by the manufacturer.
Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a
rack.
UPS User Manual
346
Technical Support
International
For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation,
and software updates: http://support.aten.com
For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iii.
North America
When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand:
Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase.
Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level,
expansion cards, and software.
Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred.
The sequence of operations that led up to the error.
Any other information you feel may be of help.
Email Support support@aten-usa.com
Online
Technical
Support
Troubleshooting
Documentation
Software Updates
http://www.aten-usa.com/support
Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988
1-949-428-1111
Appendix
347
Specifications
KE6900T / KE6940T
Function KE6900T KE6940T
Connectors Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM
Ports
KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)
(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 7.34 W DC 5 V, 8.91 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
UPS User Manual
348
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.14 kg 1.15 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm
Function KE6900T KE6940T
Appendix
349
KE6900R / KE6940R
Function KE6900R KE6940R
Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton
Video 1 x Pushbutton
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)
(Extension, RS-232 Config)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 6.9 W DC 5 V, 9.53 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.25 kg 1.25 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
UPS User Manual
350
KE6900AT / KE6940AT
Function KE6900AT KE6940AT
Connectors Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM
Ports
KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)
(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 7.95 W DC 5 V, 12.2 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Appendix
351
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.15 kg (2.53 lb) 1.17 kg (2.58 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE6900AT KE6940AT
UPS User Manual
352
KE6900AR / KE6940AR
Function KE6900AR KE6940AR
Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton
Video 1 x Pushbutton
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)
(Extension, RS-232 Config)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 6.35 W DC 5 V, 8.51 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.30 kg (2.86 lb) 1.31 kg (2.89 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
Appendix
353
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT
Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT
Connectors Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM
Ports
KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
Video 1 x DVI-I Female
(White)
2 x DVI-I Female
(White)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
1 x SFP Slot
Internet Port 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)
(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 12 V: 12 W :
60 BTU
DC 12 V : 18.36 W :
90 BTU
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
UPS User Manual
354
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.16 kg (2.56 lb) 1.18 kg (2.60 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT
Appendix
355
KE6900ST
Function KE6900ST
Connectors
KVM
Ports
KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)
Video 1 x DVI-D Male (White)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switch Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)
Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption 5 V / 7.3 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 0.43 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
14.39 x 10.30 x 3.00 cm
UPS User Manual
356
KE6910
Function KE6910R KE6910T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Appendix
357
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 9.02 W DC 5 V, 10.02 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.26 kg 1.13 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 21.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
Function KE6910R KE6910T
UPS User Manual
358
KE6912
Function KE6912R KE6912T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x SFP Slot
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Appendix
359
Power Consumption DC 48 V / 11.27 W (PoE) DC 48 V / 12.53 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.28 kg 1.17 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 21.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
Function KE6912R KE6912T
UPS User Manual
360
KE6920
Function KE6920R KE6920T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
2 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Appendix
361
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 8.86 W DC 5 V, 10.87 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.27 kg (2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE6920R KE6920T
UPS User Manual
362
KE6922
Function KE6922R KE6922T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DVI-D Female (White)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
2 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
2 x SFP Slot
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
2 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Appendix
363
Power Consumption DC 48 V / 11.54 W DC 48 V / 13.59 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.30 kg (2.86 lb) 1.18 kg (2.6 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE6922R KE6922T
UPS User Manual
364
KE8900S
Function KE8900SR KE8900ST
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(Black)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female
(Black)
N/A
1 x HDMI Female (Black)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x HDMI Female (Black)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black) 1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block
Connector (Green)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
Switches Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Power Consumption DC 5V, 4.35 W DC 5V, 3.8 W
DC 48V, 5.53 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment Operating
Temp.
0–50ºC
Storage
Temp.
-20–60ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 0.64 kg 0.65 kg
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm
Appendix
365
KE8950T / KE8952T
Function KE8950T KE8952T
Connectors Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM
Ports
KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female
(Black)
1 x RJ-45 Female
(Black; PoE)
LAN 1 x SFP Module Female (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)
(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 6.56 W DC 48 V, 9.02 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.10 kg (2.42 lb) 1.13 kg (2.49 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)
UPS User Manual
366
KE8950R / KE8952R
Function KE8950R KE8952R
Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
Console
Ports
Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female
(Black)
1 x RJ-45 Female
(Black; PoE)
LAN 1 x SFP Module Female (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton
Video 1 x Pushbutton
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)
(Extension, RS-232 Config)
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 5.65 W DC 48 V, 7.06 W
(PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.23 kg (2.71 lb) 1.26 kg (2.78 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
Appendix
367
KE9900ST
Function KE9900ST
Connectors KVM Ports 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
Switches Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs 10/100/1000 Mbps 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:
Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 4.75 W; DC 48 V, 6.97 W
Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment Operating Temp. 0 – 50 ºC
Storage Temp. -20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm
(7.17 x 4.63 x 1.13 in.)
UPS User Manual
368
KE9950
Function KE9950R KE9950T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DisplayPort Female
(Black)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 8.03 W DC 5 V, 9.51 W
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz
Appendix
369
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.24 kg (2.73 lb) 1.12 kg (2.47 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE9950R KE9950T
UPS User Manual
370
KE9952
Function KE9952R KE9952T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female
(White)
N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female
(White)
1 x DisplayPort Female
(Black)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Green)
1 x Mini Stereo Jack
(Pink)
1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x DC Jack (Black)
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x SFP Slot
1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A
Video 1 x Pushbutton
Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Mode
Selection
1 x Slide Switch
(Extension, RS-232 Con-
fig)
1 x Slide Switch
(Auto, RS-232 Config/
Access Control, Local)
LEDs 10/100/1000
Mbps
1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Power 1 x Blue
Local 1 x Green
Remote 1 x Green
Emulation Keyboard /
Mouse
USB
Power Consumption DC 48 V / 10.04 W (PoE) DC 48 V / 11.88 W (PoE)
Appendix
371
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz
Environment Operating
Te m p .
0 – 50 ºC
Storage
Te m p .
-20 – 60 ºC
Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical
Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.27 kg (2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm
(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)
21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm
(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)
Function KE9952R KE9952T
UPS User Manual
372
Optional Rack Mount
Optional rack mount kits are available as shown in the following table:
*Supports KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/
KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952.
**Please refer to VE-RMK 1U user manual on how to mount these units.
Dual Rack Mount
The 2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit installs two KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/
KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/
KE9952 units side by side in 1U of server rack space.
Transmitter Dual Rack Mount
KE8950T is the example used here.
1. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure
the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.
Mount Type Model
Dual Rack Mount Kit* 2X-021G
Single Rack Mount Kit* 2X-031G
Video Extender Rack Mount Kit**
(for KE6900ST, KE8900ST,
KE8900SR and KE9900ST)
VE-RMK 1U
Appendix
373
2. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.
3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the left and right mounting brackets.
4. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.
UPS User Manual
374
Receiver Dual Rack Mount
KE8950R is the example used here.
1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the receiver units.
2. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure
the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.
Appendix
375
3. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.
4. Use the screws in step 3 to install the left and right mounting brackets.
5. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.
UPS User Manual
376
Single Rack Mount
The 2X-031G Single Rack Mount kit installs one KE6900/KE6940/KE8950/
KE8952 unit within a 1U rack space.
1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the unit (receiver units
only).
2. Remove the bottom and side screws from the unit.
Appendix
377
3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the right and left mounting brackets.
4. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.
UPS User Manual
378
IP Installer
From a client computer running Windows, an IP address for a transmitter or
receiver can be assigned with the IP Installer utility. The utility can be obtained
from the Download area of our website or from the product page on the
Software & Driver tab. After downloading the utility to your client computer,
do the following:
1. Unzip the contents of IPInstaller.zip to a directory on your hard drive.
2. Go to the directory that you unzipped the IPInstaller program to and run
IPInstaller.exe. A dialog box similar to the one below appears:
3. Select the Transmitter or Receiver in the Device List.
Note: 1. If the list is empty, or your device doesn't appear, click
Enumerate to refresh the Device List.
2. If there is more than one device in the list, use the MAC address
to pick the one you want. The MAC address is located on the
devices bottom panel.
4. Select either Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), or Specify an
IP address. If you chose the latter, fill the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway fields with the information appropriate to your network.
5. Click Set IP.
6. After the IP address shows up in the Device List, click Exit.
Appendix
379
Trusted Certificates
Overview
When you try to log in to the device from your browser, a Security Alert
message appears to inform you that the device’s certificate is not trusted, and
asks if you want to proceed.
The certificate can be trusted, but the alert is triggered because the certificate’s
name is not found on the Microsoft list of Trusted Authorities. You can ignore
the warning and click Yes to go on.
UPS User Manual
380
Self-Signed Private Certificates
If you wish to create your own self-signed encryption key and certificate, a free
utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web at
www.openssl.org. To create your private key and certificate do the following:
1. Go to the directory where you downloaded and extracted openssl.exe to.
2. Run openssl.exe with the following parameters:
openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509
-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf
Note: 1. The command should be entered all on one line (i.e., do not press
[Enter] until all the parameters have been keyed in).
2. If there are spaces in the input, surround the entry in quotes (e.g.,
“ATEN International”).
To avoid having to input information during key generation the following
additional parameters can be used:
/C /ST /L /O /OU /CN /emailAddress.
Examples
openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509
-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj
“/C=yourcountry/ST=yourstateorprovince/L=yourlocationor
city/O=yourorganiztion/OU=yourorganizationalunit/
CN=yourcommonname/emailAddress=name@yourcompany.com
openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509
-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj
“/C=CA/ST=BC/L=Richmond/O=ATEN International/OU=ATEN
/CN=ATEN/emailAddress=eservice@aten.com.tw
Importing the Files
After the openssl.exe program completes, two files – CA.key (the private key)
and CA.cer (the self-signed SSL certificate) – are created in the directory that
you ran the program from.
Appendix
381
Reset All Information
To reset all information (including passwords) to their default settings, follow
the steps below:
1. Power off the unit and remove its housing.
2. Use a jumper cap to short the mainboard pins labeled DEFAULT
PASSWORD. An example is shown:
3. Power on the unit.
4. After the unit is turned on, power off the unit.
5. Remove the jumper cap from the Reset pins and close the housing.
6. Power on the unit again.
After powering on the unit, you can use the default administrator
Username and Password (see Logging In, page 179) to log in.
UPS User Manual
382
Default Password Pins
The Default Password pins for different models are shown below.
KE6900ST
KE6900AR
KE6900AT
Appendix
383
KE6900AiT
KE6940AR
KE6940AT
UPS User Manual
384
KE6940AiT
KE6910R / KE6912R
KE6910T / KE6912T
Appendix
385
KE6920R / KE6922R
KE6920T / KE6922T
KE8900SR
UPS User Manual
386
KE8900ST
KE8950R / KE8952R
KE8950T / KE8952T
Appendix
387
KE9900ST
KE9950R / KE9952R
KE9950T / KE9952T
UPS User Manual
388
RS-232 Pin Assignments
Pin assignments for the Transmitter and Receiver’s rear RS-232 port that is
used for connecting to a serial terminal are given in the table, below:
Transmitter Front RS-232 Port
Pin assignments for the Transmitter’s front RS-232 port that is used for
connecting to a computer for serial control are given in the table, below:
Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
DB9 Male
2 RXD Receive Data
3 TXD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request to Sent
8 CTS Clear to Sent
9 N/A None
Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
DB9 Female
2 TXD Transmit Data
3 RXD Receive Data
4 DSR Data Set Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DTR Data Terminal Ready
7 CTS Clear to Sent
8 RTS Request to Sent
9 N/A None
Appendix
389
Multicast IP Address
Multicasting helps to broadcast audio and video data from a transmitter to
multiple Receivers over a network. To setup up Multicasting on a network
switch you must know the Audio and Video Multicast IP address which can be
found on the KE Transmitter. To determinate the default Multicast IP address
set by the KE device use the instructions below. The Multicast IP addresses can
be set manually using Telnet.
KE Multicast Rule
All Audio and Video Multicast IP addresses use the format: 230.X.Y.Z.
X.Y.Z relates to the Transmitter’s IP address and 230 is always the first octet
of a Multicast IP address. You use the Transmitter’s IP address to find X and
then use it to calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address.
Multicast IP Formula
To calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address, use the Transmitter’s
IP address to determine X and then use the appropriate table below to calculate
the Multicast IP address for each data stream (audio/video).
Example:
Transmitter IP Address: 172.16.27.146; (172.X.Y.Z)
X =16
If X is between 0 ~ 127
Transmitter IP XVideo
X + 128
Audio
X + 192
Multicast
Video IP
Address
Multicast
Audio IP
Address
172.16.27.146
(example)
16 16 + 128 =
144
16 + 192 =
208
230.144.27.146 230.208.27.146
___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =
230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =
230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =
230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
UPS User Manual
390
If X is between 128 ~ 192
If X is 192 or higher
Transmitter
IP
X - 128
= A
Video
A + 128
Audio
A + 192
Multicast
Video IP
Address
Multicast
Audio IP
Address
172.168.27.14
(example)
168 - 128
= 40
40 + 128
= 168
40 + 192
= 232
230.168.27.14 230.232.27.14
___ - 128
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___ - 128
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___ - 128
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
Transmitter
IP
X - 192
= A
Video
A + 128
Audio
A + 192
Multicast
Video IP
Address
Multicast
Audio IP
Address
172.200.27.14
(example)
200 - 192
= 8
8 + 128
= 136
8 + 192
= 200
230.136.27.14 230.200.27.14
___ - 192
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___ - 192
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
___ - 192
=
___+ 128
=
___+ 192
= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__
Appendix
391
Keys to Network Performance
For optimum performance, KE Series devices requires high amounts of data to
be transferred across a network; therefore we recommend the following
strategies to setup KE Series devices. Using our suggestions will provide better
performance and the highest video resolutions possible. Use each of the keys
to ensure the best transmission of data and the highest throughput possible.
Build a Network Diagram
To build an effective KE installation, start by mapping out the layout. Create a
diagram with the KE devices, computers and routers along with how they will
be connected across the network. It also helps to write out how the devices will
interact. Use this diagram as the frame work as you decide what devices to
purchase and how to build the network effectively for the best data throughput.
Considerations:
If possible, create a private network for the KE devices
Use the same switch model throughout
Use a flat cascaded layout
Avoid a tree or pyramid structure
Limit cascades to two levels
Install network switches near each other
Minimize the distance of connections
Install KE Matrix Manager (CCKM) computer and KE devices on the
same subnet
Check the 3 Other Factors before installation
Other Factors
Choose the Right Cable
Always use Cat 5/6e Ethernet cable or higher installed by a professional
between any two devices you are installing. We recommend using ATEN
Brand Ethernet cable to ensure the quality. It’s best when installing KE devices
to use brand new Ethernet cabling for each part of the installation to ensure the
reliability of the data being transmitted. This is a key to getting the best
uninterrupted video resolution across the network.
UPS User Manual
392
Determine the Distance
Distance is an important factor when setting up networks, with a shorter
distance and fewer hops through routers, data can be transmitted more
efficiently. So whenever possible decrease the distance and direct network
traffic effectively between subnets that communicate with each other to
increase the data throughput.
Ensure the Bandwidth
Ensuring the bandwidth ahead of time will guarantee performance before
installing KE devices on a network. This will eliminate the primary cause of
problems related to video quality and transmission of data. If the speed is right
at all ends of your network, then the only other causes are derived from device
failure or limits caused by a router, switch or device setting.
Sample Network Diagram
Appendix
393
Choose a High Performance Switch
A high performance network switch is the means of a successful KE setup.
When choosing a network switch, first select the type:
Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches
You’ll need to determine whether you need a layer 2 or a layer 3 switch for
your KE network. Layer 3 switches cost more than layer 2 switches because
they are more complex and handle more network traffic. The best way to
calculate which type of switch you need is to first determine if you will have a
dedicated network for the KE devices or if the KE devices will be on a network
that shares throughput with other network equipment such as computers,
servers and printers. If they share the network with other devices its best to
consider a layer 3 switch and use layer 2 switches exclusively for the KE device
connections. For larger installations we recommend using Layer 3 switches.
The major differences are:
Layer 3 Switch: IP addresses in packets are examined and intelligent
forwarding decisions are made. On a larger network broken into subnets
across long distances, a layer 3 switch becomes the best choice as they
can improve network efficiency and provide better traffic flow. They
are better at directing more traffic to different locations on a larger more
complex network, and with layer two switches working below them.
Layer 2 Switch: Packets are examined and forwarded using only the
MAC address. If you have a small central network, a layer 2 switch
should do the job. If the network is exclusive and will only transmit the
bandwidth of KE devices, layer 2 switches with the correct settings can
get the job done effectively.
Considerations
Number of ports
Choose a switch that has enough ports to match the number of KE devices you
will be installing. Switches typically come in 5, 8, 10, 16, 24, 28, 48, and 52-
port configurations. If you are installing 13 KE transmitters and 13 KE
receivers, you will need to purchase a switch with at least 28 ports.
Stackable verse Standalone
Stackable switches allow you to easily manage and configure ports spanning
across multiple switches that the KE devices are connected through. This
provides a centralized method to configure and troubleshoot the initial setup of
UPS User Manual
394
KE devices on a network which makes fine tuning the bandwidth, data
throughput and video quality easier. Stackable switches can be configured to
direct the KE transmissions between many units more specifically and
effectively. Standalone switches provide the same configuration features as
Stackable switches but they must be set individually.
Stackable switches provide an easy way to manage multiple switches, as one
unit. For example, instead of configuring, managing, and troubleshooting 6 28-
port switches individually, you can manage the six as if they are a single unit
using Stackable Switches. The six switches (168 ports) function as a single
switch and are managed from one web or GUI interface.
What Stackable Switches Can do:
1. Create a link aggregation group with one port in one unit of the stack and
another port of that group in another switch in the stack.
2. Select a port on one switch in the stack and mirror the traffic to a switch
port on another unit of the stack; thus copy the configuration to direct
traffic more effectively between KE devices.
3. Apply custom ACL security settings to any port on any switch in the stack.
4. Stackable switches can be setup in a ring configuration, so that if a port or
cable fails, the stack automatically routes around the failure, at
microsecond speeds. Stackable Switches also allow you to add and remove
stack “members” which are automatically updated and recognized as such.
Switch Specifications
The following specifications are recommended when choosing a layer 2 or
layer 3 switch:
1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (1000Mbps or faster Ethernet ports)
High bandwidth between switches, if possible using Fibre Channel
Layer 3 switches that efficiently processes IGMP queries
IGMP Snooping v2 or v3
Flow Control Functions
Throughput of: Full Duplex, 1Gbps up- and down- stream speeds per port
Performance of their most onerous tasks (e.g. IGMP snooping) with
multiple dedicated processors (ASICS)
Use the same switch make and model throughout each subnet
Appendix
395
The maximum number of simultaneous ‘snoopable groups’ the switch can
handle meets or exceeds the number of KE transmitters that will be used to
create Channel groups
Configuring Switches and KE Devices
Configuring the switch correctly will pass data more efficiently, allowing a
better stream across the network to each KE device. The following settings will
help optimize your network traffic through a switch:
Enable IGMP Snooping on L2 switches
Enable IGMP Querier on the L3 switch
Enable IGMP Fast-Leave on all switches where KE units are directly
connected
Enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on all switches and enable Portfast
exclusively on switch ports that have KE units connected
Pick an appropriate forwarding mode on all switches. Use Cut-through if
available, or Store and Forward (see Recommended Network Switches
below)
KE transmitter Settings:
Adjust the KE transmitter settings one at a time, in small intervals, and
view the images as you do, so that you can adjust to the positive or
negative results and achieve the best quality and bandwidth possible
If the quality of color is important, set the Color Depth to 24 bits (KE69
Series) or 36 bits (KE89 Series) and manually adjust other settings until
you are satisfied with the visual appearance
If moving video images are shown frequently, increase the Video Quality
setting to the highest level and reduce the Bandwidth Limit and Color
Depth setting.
When images on the screen are more often static, increase the Background
Refresh and/or the Video Quality settings
Check that all KE units have been updated with the latest firmware version
Recommended Network Switches
Below are the network switches that have passed ATEN's stress tests using the
KE Series extenders. Our tests streamed content over a network with a
resolution of 1920 x 1200 @60Hz (KE69 Series, KE8900S, KE9900ST); 24 bit
color depth and 3840 x 2160 @30Hz (KE8950 and KE8952); 36 bit color
depth.
UPS User Manual
396
Cisco Catalyst 2960X / Catalyst 2960XR / Catalyst 3750
HP Procurve 2920
H3C S5120
Huawei S5700
DLink DGS-1510
Please refer to the FAQ link below on how to select network switches and
network switch information collected by ATEN Customer Service Division,
where the collected information includes customer's feedback from their actual
experience in using and installing the product(s).
https://eservice.aten.com/eServiceCx/Common/FAQ/view.do?id=6276
Appendix
397
Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures
If the mouse synchronization procedures mentioned in the manual fail to
resolve mouse pointer problems for particular computers, try the following:
Windows:
Note: In order for the local and remote mouses to synchronize, you must use
the generic mouse driver supplied with the MS operating system. If you
have a third party driver installed - such as one supplied by the mouse
manufacturer - you must remove it.
1. Windows 2000:
a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel
→
Mouse
→
Mouse Properties)
b) Click the Motion tab
c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)
d) Set the mouse acceleration to None
2. Windows XP / Windows Server 2003 / Windows 7 / Windows 8 /
Windows 10:
a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel
→
Mouse)
(For Windows 10, click Start
→
Devices
→
Mouse
→
Additional
mouse options)
UPS User Manual
398
b) Click the Pointer Options tab
c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)
d) Disable Enhance Pointer Precision
3. Windows ME:
Set the mouse speed to the middle position; disable mouse acceleration
(click Advanced to get the dialog box for this).
4. Windows NT / Windows 98 / Windows 95:
Set the mouse speed to the slowest position.
Sun / Linux
Open a terminal session and issue the following command:
Sun: xset m 1
Linux: xset m 0
or
xset m 1
(If one does not help, try the other.)
Appendix
399
Virtual Media Support
WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP
IDE CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only
IDE Hard Drives – Read Only
USB CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only
USB Hard Drives – Read/Write*
USB Flash Drives – Read/Write*
USB Floppy Drives – Read/Write
*These drives can be mounted either as Drives or Removable Disks
(see Virtual Media, page 295). Mounting them as removable disks allow
booting the remote server if the disk contains a bootable OS. In addition,
if the disk contains more than one partition, the remote server can access
all the partitions.
ISO Files – Read Only
Folders – Read/Write
Smart Card Readers
Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP
ISO Files – Read Only
Folders – Read/Write
Note: 1. The Java Client supports Virtual Media in the same way as WinClient
does – however, the account should have Administrator level
privilege.
2. Folder mapping uses a FAT16 file system, so there is a 2G limitation.
Virtual Media only supports ISO files less than 4G.
UPS User Manual
400
Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows
1. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.
3. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.
4. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP for the CCKM
server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.0.2 and
192.168.0.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway
that corresponds with your network setup.
5. Click OK to change the CCKM server’s IP address.
Note: Make sure the CCKM server's IP address is not a duplicate to prevent
IP address conflict.
To connect to the CCKM server via web browser, enter the CCKM IP address
and port number (default: 8443). For example, if the CCKM IP address is
192.168.0.10, then enter https://192.168.0.10: 8443.
If you have a 2nd NIC, please follow the following steps.
6. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.
7. Right-click Local Area Connection for the 2nd NIC and select
Properties.
8. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.
9. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP of the 2nd subnet
for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between
192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and
Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup.
10. Click OK to change the CCKM server’s IP address of the 2nd subnet.
Appendix
401
Limited Warranty
ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in
materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty
period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of
original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD
KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+
Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the
Standard Warranty.
What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty
ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty
Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option
to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the
entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills
the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the
warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days,
whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the
replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles
shall become the property of ATEN.
To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website:
http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/
© Copyright 2021 ATEN® International Co., Ltd.
Released: 2021-09-09
ATEN and the ATEN logo are registered trademarks of ATEN International Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
All other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners.